Yandex MC

Mitchell onDemand(proDemand) web-online. Is free

DATACENTER ERROR!!! Внимание! Авария в датацентре!!


Subscribe to the telegram channel https://t.me/kolhosniki_en

Place for your advertisement

predsedatel@kolhosniki.ru
Click for start

2004 ENGINE PERFORMANCE

SFI System (2AZ-FE) - Diagnostics - Highlander

DEFINITION OF TERMS

Fig. 1: SFI System Terms & Definition Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

PART AND SYSTEM NAME LIST

This reference list indicates the part names used in this manual along with their definitions.

Fig. 2: Parts & System Name List
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

LOCATION

Fig. 3: Locating SFI System Components (2AZ-FE)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING

The hand-held tester is used in steps 3, 4, 5, 7 and 10.

  1. VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP
    1. Go to next step.
  2. CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (See CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK)
    1. Go to next step.
  3. CONNECT HAND-HELD TESTER TO DLC3

    HINT:

    If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool, inspect the DLC3.

    1. Go to next step.
  4. CHECK PTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (See DTC CHECK/CLEAR)

    HINT:

    Record or print DTC and freeze frame data, if needed.

    1. Go to next step.
  5. CLEAR DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (See DTC CHECK/CLEAR)
    1. Go to next step.
  6. VISUAL INSPECTION
    1. Go to next step.
  7. SETTING CHECK (TEST) MODE DIAGNOSIS (See CHECK MODE PROCEDURE)
    1. Go to next step.
  8. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION

    HINT:

    If the engine does not start, perform steps 10 and 12 first.

    PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
    Malfunction does not occur A
    Malfunction occurs B

    1. B: Go to step 10
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. SYMPTOM SIMULATION
    1. Go to next step.
  10. DTC CHECK (See DTC CHECK/CLEAR)

    DTC CHECKING
    Malfunction code A
    No code B

    1. B: Go to step 12
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. PTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    1. Go to step 14
  12. BASIC INSPECTION (See BASIC INSPECTION)

    BASIC INSPECTION
    Wrong parts not confirmed A
    Wrong parts confirmed B

    1. B: Go to step 17
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  13. PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE)

    PROBLEM SYMPTOMS
    Wrong circuit confirmed A
    Wrong parts confirmed B

    1. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
    2. B: Go to step 17
  14. CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)
    1. Go to next step.
  15. CIRCUIT INSPECTION

    CIRCUIT INSPECTION
    Malfunction not confirmed A
    Malfunction confirmed B

    1. B: Go to step 18
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  16. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    1. Go to step 18
  17. PARTS INSPECTION
    1. Go to next step.
  18. IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM
    1. Go to next step.
  19. ADJUSTMENT, REPAIR
    1. Go to next step.
  20. CONFIRMATION TEST
    1. END

CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK

Fig. 4: Customer Problem Analysis Check Sheet
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

Hand-held tester only:

Inspect the vehicle's ECM using check mode. Intermittent problems are easier to detect when the ECM is in check mode with the hand-held tester. In check mode, the ECM uses 1 trip detection logic, which has a higher sensitivity to malfunctions than normal mode (default), which uses 2 trip detection logic.

  1. Clear the DTCs (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
  2. Set the check mode (see CHECK MODE PROCEDURE).
  3. Perform a simulation test (See HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING ).
  4. Check the connector and terminal (See ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE ).
  5. Wiggle the harness and the connector (See ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT INSPECTION PROCEDURE ).

BASIC INSPECTION

When the malfunction is not confirmed in the DTC check, troubleshooting should be carried out in all the possible circuits considered as possible causes of the problem. In many cases, by carrying out the basic engine check shown in the following flowchart, the problem can be found quickly and efficiently. Therefore, using this check is essential in the engine troubleshooting.

  1. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

    NOTE: Carry out the battery voltage check with the engine stopped and ignition switch OFF.

    BATTERY VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
    OK NG
    Voltage 11 V or more Less than 11 V

    1. NG: CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK IF ENGINE WILL CRANK
    1. NG: PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK IF ENGINE STARTS
    1. NG: Go to step 7
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK AIR FILTER

    Visually check if the air filter is contaminated with dirty or oily.

    1. NG: CLEAN OR REPLACE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK IDLE SPEED (See INSPECTION )
    1. NG: PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )
    1. NG: PROCEED TO ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND CONTINUE TO TROUBLESHOOT
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK FOR SPARK (See INSPECTION )
    1. NG: PROCEED TO ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION AND CONTINUE TO ITROUBLESHOOT
    2. OK: PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR

HINT:

The following tables show the ECM monitoring status for the components listed in the top of the table when the DTCs on the left of the table are set.

Fig. 5: Disabled Monitor Chart (1 Of 6)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 6: Disabled Monitor Chart (2 Of 6)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 7: Disabled Monitor Chart (3 Of 6)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 8: Disabled Monitor Chart (4 Of 6)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 9: Disabled Monitor Chart (5 Of 6)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 10: Disabled Monitor Chart (6 Of 6)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

O2S TEST RESULT

  1. INTRODUCTION

    The O2S TEST RESULT refers to the results of the engine control module (ECM) when it monitors the oxygen sensor (O2S), and it can be read using the hand-held tester or the generic OBD II scan tool. Based on this, you can find the O2S's conditions.

    The ECM monitors the O2S for various data. You can read the monitor result (TEST DATA) of each monitor item using the O2S TEST RESULT. However, the output value of the TEST DATA is the latest "snapshot" value that is taken after monitoring and therefore it is not dynamic.

    In this service information, the description of the O2S TEST RESULT (for O2S related DTCs) are written in a table.

    This table consists of 5 items:

    1. TEST ID (a code applied to each TEST DATA)
    2. Description of TEST DATA
    3. Conversion Factor (When conversion factor has a value written in the table, multiply the TEST DATA value appearing on the scan tool by the conversion factor value. The result will be the required value.)
    4. Unit
    5. Standard Value

    If the TEST DATA value appearing on the scan tool is out of the standard value, the O2S is malfunctioning. If it is within the standard value, the O2S is functioning normally. However, if the value is on the borderline of the standard value, the O2S may malfunction very soon.

  2. HOW TO READ O2S TEST RESULT USING HANDHELD TESTER
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. On the tester screen, select the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/CARB OBDII/O2S TEST RESULT. A list of the O2S equipped on the vehicle will be displayed.

      3. Fig. 11: Identifying 02S Test Result Screen
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    3. Select the desired O2S and press ENTER. The following screen will appear. See Fig. 12.

      4. Fig. 12: Identifying Test Data Screen
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    4. Press HELP and H simultaneously. More information will appear.
    5. Example:
      1. The hand-held tester displays "17" as a value of the "TIME $81" (see the illustration on the left).
      2. Find the conversion factor value of "TIME $81" in the O2S TEST RESULT chart below. 0.3906 is specified for $81 in this chart.
      3. Multiply "17" in step (1) by 0.3906 (conversion factor) in the step (2).

        17 x 0.3906 = 6.6%

      4. If the answer is within the standard value, the "TIME $81" can be confirmed to be normal.

O2S TEST RESULT Chart:

02S TEST RESULT
TEST ID Description of TEST DATA Conversion Factor Unit Standard Value
$81 Percentage of monitoring time when the O2S voltage is less than 0.05 V Multiply 0.3906 % Within 60 %

CHECKING MONITOR STATUS

NOTE: The Monitor Status is not applicable to the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). The HO2S status can be checked with O2S TEST RESULT (see O2S TEST RESULT).

  1. INTRODUCTION

    The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in the emission-related components such as the catalyst, EVAP and thermostat can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. The monitor status information is included under the "MONITOR STATUS" in the emission-related DTC sections.

    The ECM (PCM) monitors the emission-related components. After the monitor, the ECM stores the monitor result and test value. The monitor result indicates whether the component is functioning normally or not (PASS or FAIL). The test value is the value that was used to determine the monitor result. When the test value is inside the test limit, the ECM determines the component is functioning normally (PASS). If the test value is outside the test limit, the ECM determines the component is malfunctioning (FAIL).

  2. PROCEDURE NOTICE:

    NOTE: The monitor result and test value are cleared when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Clear the DTCs.
    4. Run the vehicle in accordance with the applicable drive pattern described in READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN (see READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN).
    5. Select from the tester menus: DIAGNOSIS, ENHANCED OBD II, MONITOR INFO and MONITOR RESULT. The monitor result appears after the component name.

      INCMP: The component has not been monitored yet.

      PASS: The component is functioning normally.

      FAIL: The component is malfunctioning.

    6. Confirm that the component is set to either PASS or FAIL.

      7. Fig. 13: Identifying Monitor Result Screen Display
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    7. Select the component (Label) and press ENTER. The accuracy test value appears when the monitor result is either PASS or FAIL.

      VAL The test value

      LMT: The test limit

      TLT: The test limit type. Either 0 or 1 is displayed.

    8. If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit. If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.
    9. Compare the test value with the test limit. The test value is usually significantly higher or lower than the test limit. If the test value is on the borderline of the test limit, there is a potential malfunction in the component.

      10. Fig. 14: Identifying Thermostat Malfunction Screen Display
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

The monitor result might on rare occasions be PASS even if the MIL is illuminated. This indicates the system malfunctioned on a previous driving cycle. This might be caused by an intermittent problem.

READINESS MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN

  1. PURPOSE OF THE READINESS TESTS
    • The On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) system is designed to monitor the performance of emission-related components, and report any detected abnormalities with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Since various components need to be monitored during different driving conditions, the OBD II system runs separate monitoring programs called readiness monitors.
    • The hand-held tester's software must be version 9.0 or newer to view the readiness monitor status. From the "ENHANCED OBD II" menu, select "MONITOR STATUS" to view the readiness monitor status.
    • A generic OBD II scan tool can also be used to view the readiness monitor status.
    • When the readiness monitor status reads "complete", the necessary conditions have been met for running performance tests for that readiness monitor.

    HINT:

    Many state Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs require a vehicle's readiness monitor status to show "complete".

    • The readiness monitor will be reset to "incomplete" if:
      • The ECM has lost battery power or blown a fuse.
      • DTCs have been cleared.
      • The conditions for running the readiness monitor have not been met.
    • If the readiness monitor status shows "incomplete", follow the appropriate readiness monitor drive pattern to change the status to "complete".

    CAUTION: Strictly observe posted speed limits, traffic laws, and road conditions when performing these drive patterns.

    NOTE: The following drive patterns are the fastest method of completing all the requirements necessary for making the readiness monitor status read "complete".
    If forced to momentarily stop a drive pattern due to traffic or other factors, the drive pattern can be resumed. Upon completion of the drive pattern, in most cases, the readiness monitor status will change to "complete".
    Sudden changes in vehicle load and speed, such as driving up and down hills and/or sudden acceleration, hinder readiness monitor completion.

  2. CATALYST MONITOR (A/F SENSOR TYPE)

    Fig. 15: Identifying Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern - Catalyst Monitor (A/F Sensor Type)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Preconditions
      • The monitor will not run unless:
      • The MIL is OFF.
      • Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is 75°C (167°F) or greater.
      • Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is -10°C (14°F) or greater.*

      NOTE: * 2002 and later MY vehicles:
      To complete the readiness test in cold ambient conditions (less than -10°C/14°F), turn the ignition switch OFF and then back to ON. Perform the drive pattern a second time.

    2. Drive Pattern
      1. Connect the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3 to check readiness monitor status and preconditions (refer to step (a)).
      2. Drive the vehicle at 40 to 55 mph (64 to 88 km/h) for approximately 4 minutes.

        NOTE: Drive with smooth throttle operation and avoid sudden acceleration.
        If IAT was less than 10°C (50°F) when the engine was started, drive the vehicle at 40 to 55 mph (64 to 88 km/h) for an additional 4 minutes.

      3. Drive the vehicle allowing speed to fluctuate between 40 to 50 mph (64 to 80 km/h) for about 16 minutes.

        NOTE: Drive with smooth throttle operation and avoid sudden closure of the throttle.

      4. Check the status of the readiness monitor on the scan tool display. If the readiness monitor status did not switch to complete, ensure preconditions are met, turn the ignition OFF, and then repeat steps (2) and (3).
  3. EVAP MONITOR (PURGE FLOW MONITOR)
    1. Preconditions

      The monitor will run when all of the following conditions are met:

      • The fuel level is less than 90%.
      • The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is more than 4.4°C (40°F).
      • The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is more than 4.4°C (40°F).
    2. Drive Pattern
      1. Connect the scan tool to the DLC3 to check the monitor status and the preconditions.
      2. Run the engine until the ECT is more the 75°C (167°F).
      3. Run the engine at 3,000 rpm for 10 seconds.
      4. Allow the engine to idle and turn on the air conditioning (A/C). Wait for 5 minutes.
      5. Check the readiness monitor status.

    NOTE: If the vehicle does not have A/C, put a slight electrical load on the engine by following the steps below:
    • Set the parking brake securely.
    • Use wheel chocks to secure the tires.
    • Move the shift lever to the D position and allow the engine to idle for 15 to 50 minutes.

      Check the readiness monitor status.

    If the status is displayed "INCMP", the monitor does not complete. Turn the ignition switch OFF, confirm the preconditions and perform the drive pattern again.

  4. EVAP MONITOR (KEY-OFF MONITOR)
    1. Preconditions

      The monitor will run when all of the following conditions are met:

      • The fuel level is less than 90 %.
      • The altitude is less than 8,000 ft. (2,450 m).
      • The vehicle is stopping.
      • The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 4.4 and 35°C (40 to 95°F).
      • The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 4.4 and 35°C (40 to 95 °F).
    2. Monitor condition
      1. Allow the engine at idle for 300 seconds or more.
      2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 6 hours.
      3. Connect the scan tool to the DLC3 to check the monitor status and the preconditions.
      4. Check the readiness monitor status.

    If the status is displayed "INCMP", the monitor does not complete. Turn the ignition switch OFF, confirm the preconditions and perform the monitor condition again.

  5. OXYGEN/AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR MONITOR (FRONT A/F SENSOR AND REAR O2S SYSTEM)

    Fig. 16: Identifying Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern - Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Monitor
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Preconditions

      The monitor will not run unless:

      The MIL is OFF.

    2. Drive Pattern
      1. Connect the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions (refer to step (a)).
      2. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes or more.
      3. Drive the vehicle at 64 to 112 km/h (40 to 70 mph) for at least 150 seconds.
      4. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 10 seconds or more.
      5. Drive the vehicle at 40 to 64 km/h (25 to 40 mph) for at least 40 seconds.
      6. Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle for 10 seconds or more.
      7. Perform steps (5) and (6) ten times.
      8. Check the readiness monitor status. If the readiness monitor status did not change to "complete", check the preconditions, turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat steps (1) to (6).
  6. OXYGEN/A/F SENSOR HEATER MONITOR

    Fig. 17: Identifying Readiness Monitor Drive Pattern - Oxygen/Af Sensor Heater Monitor
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Preconditions

      The monitor will not run unless:

      The MIL is OFF.

    2. Drive Pattern
      1. Connect the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3 to check monitor status and preconditions (refer to step (a)).
      2. Start the engine and allow it to idle for 500 second or more.
      3. Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 mph) or more for at least 2 minutes.
      4. Check the readiness monitor status. If the readiness monitor status did not change to "complete", check preconditions, turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat steps (2) and (3).

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

Fig. 18: Problem Symptoms Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TERMINALS OF ECM

Fig. 19: View Of ECM Connector Terminals
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

Each ECM terminal's standard voltage is shown in the table below.

In the table, first follow the information under "Condition". Next look under "Symbols (Terminal No.)" for the terminals to be inspected. The standard voltage between the terminals is shown under "Specific Condition".

Use the illustration above as a reference for the ECM terminals.

Fig. 20: ECM Terminals Voltage Specifications (1 Of 2)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 21: ECM Terminals Voltage Specifications (2 Of 2)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM

  1. DESCRIPTION
    • When troubleshooting On-Board Diagnostic (OBD II) vehicles, the vehicle must be connected to the OBD II scan tool (in compliance with SAE J1978) or the hand-held tester. Various data output from the vehicle's ECM can then be read.
    • OBD II regulations require that the vehicle's on-board computer illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in: 1) the emission control system/components, or 2) the powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions), or 3) the computer. In addition, the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by SAE J2012 are recorded in the ECM memory (see DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART).

    If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips, the MIL turns off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory.

    Fig. 22: Identifying Malfunction Indicator Lamp
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    • To check DTCs, connect the hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. The hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool also enables you to erase the DTC and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data (see the instruction manual for the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester). The DTC includes SAE controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. SAE controlled codes must be set according to the SAE, while manufacturer controlled codes can be set by a manufacturer with certain restrictions (see the DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART).
    • The diagnosis system operates in "normal mode" during normal vehicle use. In "normal mode", 2 trip detection logic* is used to ensure accurate detection of malfunctions. A "check mode" is also available to technicians as an option. In "check mode", 1 trip detection logic is used for simulating malfunction symptoms and increasing the system's ability to detect malfunctions, including intermittent malfunctions (hand-held tester only) (see CHECK MODE PROCEDURE).

      • Fig. 23: Connecting DLC3 To Hand-held tester
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    • *2 trip detection logic:

      When a malfunction is first detected, the malfunction is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). If the ignition switch is turned OFF and then ON again, and the same malfunction is detected again, the MIL will illuminate (2nd trip).

    • Freeze frame data:

      The freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system, calculated load, engine coolant temperature, fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, etc.) when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

    Priorities for troubleshooting:

    When multiple DTCs occur, find out the order in which the DTCs should be inspected by checking the component's DTC chart. If no instructions are written in the DTC chart, check DTCs in the following order of priority:

    1. DTCs other than fuel trim malfunction DTCs (P0171 and P0172) and misfire DTCs (P0300 to P0304).
    2. Fuel trim malfunction DTCs (P0171 and P0172).
    3. Misfire DTCs (P0300 to P0304).
  2. CHECK DLC3

    The vehicle's ECM uses the ISO 9141-2 for communication protocol. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with SAE J1962 and matches the ISO 9141-2 format.

    Fig. 24: Identifying DLC3 Terminals
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    DLC3 TERMINALS CONDITIONS AND RESISTANCE/VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
    Symbol Terminal No. Name Reference terminal Result Condition
    SIL 7 Bus "+" line 5 - Signal ground Pulse generation During transmission
    CG 4 Chassis ground Body ground Below 1 ohms Always
    SG 5 Signal ground Body ground Below 1 ohms Always
    BAT 16 Battery positive Body ground 9 to 14 V Always

    HINT:

    Connect the cable of the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester to the DLC3, turn the ignition switch ON and attempt to use the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester. If the screen displays UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE, a problem exists in the vehicle side or the tester side.

    • If the communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle, inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle.
    • If the communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle, the problem is probably in the tool itself. Consult the Service Department listed in the tool's instruction manual.
  3. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

    Standard: 11 to 14 V

    If the voltage is below 11 V, recharge the battery before proceeding.

  4. CHECK MIL
    1. The MIL turns on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running.

      HINT:

      If the MIL does not turn on, troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see MIL CIRCUIT).

    2. When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. If the lamp remains on, the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system.

DTC CHECK/CLEAR

NOTE:
  • If no DTC appears in normal mode:

    On the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester check the pending fault code using the Continuous Test Results function (Mode 7 for SAE J1979).

  • When the diagnosis system is changed from normal mode to check mode or vice-versa, all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode will be erased. Before changing modes, always check and make a note of DTCs and freeze frame data.

  1. CHECK DTC (Using the OBD II scan tool or hand-held tester)
    1. Connect the OBD II scan tool or hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Use the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down.

      For the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DTC INFO/CURRENT CODES. For the OBD II scan tool, see its instruction manual.

    4. See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART to confirm the details of the DTCs.

    NOTE: When simulating a symptom with the OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester) to check for DTCs, use the normal mode. For DTCs subject to "2 trip detection logic", perform either of the following actions.
    • Turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process again. When the problem has been simulated twice, the MIL illuminates and the DTCs are recorded in the ECM.
    • Check the pending fault code using the Continuous Test Results function (Mode 7 for SAE J1979) on the OBD II scan tool.

      • Fig. 25: Connecting DLC3 To Hand held Tester
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  2. CLEAR DTC (Using the OBD II scan tool or hand-held tester)
    1. Connect the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Erase DTCs and freeze frame data with the OBD II scan tool (complying with SAE J1978) or the hand-held tester. For the hand-held tester: 1) enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DTC INFO/CLEAR CODES; and 2) press YES. For the OBD II scan tool, see its instruction manual.
  3. CLEAR DTC (Not using the OBD II scan tool or handheld tester)
    1. Remove the EFI NO. 1 fuse from the engine room J/B and ETCS fuse from the engine room R/B No. 2 for more than 60 seconds. Or, disconnect the battery terminal for more than 60 seconds.

      After disconnecting the battery cable, perform the "INITIALIZE" procedure (See INITIALIZATION ).

      2. Fig. 26: Locating EFI No. 1 And ETCS Fuses
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CHECK MODE PROCEDURE

HINT:

Hand-held tester only:

Check mode has a higher sensitivity to malfunctions and can detect malfunctions that normal mode cannot detect. Check mode can also detect all the malfunctions that normal mode can detect.

  1. CHECK MODE PROCEDURE (Using the hand-held tester)
    1. Make sure that the items below are true:
      1. Battery positive voltage 11 V or more
      2. Throttle valve fully closed
      3. Transmission in the P or N position
      4. A/C switched OFF
    2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    3. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    4. Turn the ignition switch ON.

      5. Fig. 27: Connecting DLC3 To Hand Held Tester
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    5. Change the ECM to check mode with the hand-held tester. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/CHECK MODE. Make sure the MIL flashes as shown in the illustration.

      Fig. 28: Identifying Malfunction Indicator Lamp Flashing Pattern
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      NOTE: All DTCs and freeze frame data recorded will be erased if: 1) the hand-held tester is used to change the ECM from normal mode to check mode or vice-versa; or 2) during check mode, the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF.

    6. Start the engine. The MIL should turn off after the engine starts.
    7. Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.
    8. After simulating the malfunction conditions, use the hand-held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTC, freeze frame data and other data.
      1. After checking the DTC, inspect the applicable circuit.
  2. CLEAR DTC (Using the OBD II scan tool or hand-held tester)
    1. Connect the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Erase DTCs and freeze frame data with the OBD II scan tool (complying with SAE J1978) or the hand-held tester. For the hand-held tester: 1) enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DTC INFO/CLEAR CODES; and 2) press YES. For the OBD II scan tool, see its instruction manual.
  3. CLEAR DTC (Not using the OBD II scan tool or handheld tester)
    1. Remove the EFI NO. 1 fuse from the engine room J/B and ETCS fuse from the engine room R/B No. 2 for more than 60 seconds.

      Or, disconnect the battery cable for more than 60 seconds. After disconnecting the battery terminal, perform the "INITIALIZE" procedure (See INITIALIZATION ).

      2. Fig. 29: Locating EFI No. 1 And ETCS Fuses
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

FAIL-SAFE CHART

If any of the following codes are recorded, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.

Fig. 30: ECM Fail-Safe Mode Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DATA LIST/ACTIVE TEST/SYSTEM CHECK

  1. DATA LIST

    HINT:

    Using the hand-held tester DATA LIST allows switch, sensor, actuator and other item values to be read without removing any parts. Reading the DATA LIST early in troubleshooting is one way to shorten labor time.

    NOTE: In the table below, the values listed under "Normal Condition" are reference values. Do not depend solely on the these reference values when deciding whether a part is faulty or not.

    1. Warm up the engine.
    2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    3. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    5. Turn ON the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.
    6. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST.
    7. According to the display on tester, read the "DATA LIST".

      8. Fig. 31: Hand Held Tester Data List (1 Of 3)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Fig. 32: Hand Held Tester Data List (2 Of 3)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Fig. 33: Hand Held Tester Data List (3 Of 3)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    HINT:

    *: If no conditions are specifically stated for "ldling", the shift lever is in the N or P position, the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF.

  2. ACTIVE TEST

    HINT:

    Performing the hand-held tester ACTIVE TEST allows relay, VSV, actuator and other items to be operated without removing any parts. Performing the ACTIVE TEST early in troubleshooting is one way to shorten labor time. The DATA LIST can be displayed during the ACTIVE TEST.

    1. Warm up the engine.
    2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    3. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    5. Turn ON the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.
    6. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST.
    7. According to the display on tester, perform the "ACTIVE TEST.

      Fig. 34: Hand Held Tester Active Test Chart (1 Of 2)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 35: Hand Held Tester Active Test Chart (2 Of 2)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  3. SYSTEM CHECK

    HINT:

    Performing the hand-held tester SYSTEM CHECK allows the system which is composed of multiple actuators to be operated without removing any parts.

    Operate the system by performing SYSTEM CHECK and check for DTCs. And, potential malfunctions in the system can be detected on the tester.

    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch and the hand-held tester.
    3. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/SYSTEM CHECK.
    4. According to the display on the tester, perform the "SYSTEM CHECK.

      Fig. 36: Hand Held Tester System Check Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART
DTC Description
DTC P0010 CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1)
DTC P0011, P0012 CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" (BANK 1)
DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1 SENSOR A)
DTC P0031, P0032 OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
DTC P0037, P0038 OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2),
DTC P0100, P0102, P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
DTC P0110, P0112, P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
DTC P0115, P0117, P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
DTC P0116 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
DTC P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0223, P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH CIRCUIT
DTC P0121 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A" CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL
DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)
DTC P0136, P0137, P0138 OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
DTC P0171, P0172 SYSTEM LEAN/RICH (BANK 1)
DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED
DTC P0325, P0327, P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
DTC P0335, P0339 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT
DTC P0340, P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT
DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354 IGNITION COIL PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1)
DTC P043E, P043F EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM REFERENCE ORIFICE
DTC P0441 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM INCORRECT PURGE FLOW
DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0455, P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED
DTC P0500, P0503 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR "A"
DTC P0504 BRAKE SWITCH "A"/"B" CORRELATION
DTC P0505 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0560 SYSTEM VOLTAGE
DTC P0604, P0606, P0607, P0657 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE/ECM-PCM/SUPPLY VOLTAGE
DTC P0617 STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT HIGH
DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT)
DTC P2102, P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT
DTC P2111, P2112 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P2118 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CURRENT RANGE/PERFORMANCE
DTC P2119 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL THROTTLE BODY RANGE/PERFORMANCE
DTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH CIRCUIT
DTC P2121 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "D" CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE
DTC P2195, P2196 OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
DTC P2238, P2239, P2252, P2253 OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
DTC P2401, P2402 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
DTC P2419, P2420 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT
DTC P2421, P2422 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CHECK VALVE STUCK
DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE
DTC P2A00 A/F SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK1 SENSOR 1)

HINT:

Parameters listed in the chart may be different than your readings depending on the type of instrument used and other factors.

During the DTC check, refer to the DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART if a malfunction code is displayed. For details about each code, refer to DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DETECTION ITEM/TROUBLE AREA CHARTS.

Fig. 37: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (1 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 38: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (2 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 39: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (3 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 40: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (4 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 41: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (5 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 42: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (6 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 43: Diagnostic Trouble Code Detection Item/Trouble Area Chart (7 Of 7)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DTC P0010: CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system includes the ECM, the Oil Control Valve (OCV) and the VVT controller. The ECM sends a target duty-cycle control signal to the OCV. This control signal, applied to the OCV, regulates the oil pressure supplied to the VVT controller. Camshaft timing control is performed based on engine operation conditions such as intake air volume, throttle position and engine coolant temperature. The ECM controls the OCV based on the signals output from several sensors. The VVT controller regulates the intake camshaft angle using oil pressure through the OCV. As result, the relative position between the camshaft and the crankshaft is optimized, also, the engine torque improves, fuel economy improves, and exhaust emissions decrease. The ECM detects the actual valve timing using signals from the camshaft position sensor and the crankshaft position sensor. The ECM performs feedback control and verifies target valve timing.

Fig. 44: Camshaft Position "A" Actuator Circuit Diagram (Bank 1)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 45: Diagnostic Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0010)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

After the ECM sends the "target" duty-cycle signal to the OCV, the ECM monitors the OCV current to establish an "actual" duty-cycle. When the actual duty-cycle ratio varies from the target duty-cycle ratio, the ECM sets a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0010: VVT OCV range check
Required sensors/ components (Main) VVT OCV
Required sensors / components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 1 sec.
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Battery voltage 11 V or more
Target duty ratio for the OCV 70 % or less
Starter OFF
Current cut status for the OCV Not cut

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Either of the following condition is set:
OCV duty ratio 100 % (always ON) despite the target duty ratio is less than 70 %
OCV duty ratio when ECM supplies current to OCV 3 % or less despite the ECM supplying current to the OCV

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE
VVT OCV duty ratio More than 3 % and less than 100 %

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 46: C2 OCV And ECM Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester:

  1. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND-HELD TESTER (OCV OPERATION)
    1. Start the engine and warm it up.
    2. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    3. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester main switch.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/VVT CTRL B1.
    5. Using the hand-held tester, operate the OCV and check the engine speed.

      Standard:

      TESTER OPERATION & AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Operation Specified Condition
      OCV is OFF Normal engine speed
      OCV is ON Rough idle or engine stall

    1. OK: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (OCV) (See INSPECTION )

    OK: OCV has no contamination and moves smoothly.

    1. NG: REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK ECM (OCV SIGNAL)
    1. During idling, check the waveform of the ECM connector using an oscilloscope.

      Fig. 47: Identifying Test Terminals & OCV Signal Waveform
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION & AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-16 (OC1+) - E9-15 (OC1-) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (OCV - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the C2 OCV connector.
    2. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 48: Identifying ECM And C2 OCV Connector Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION & AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      C2-1 (OCV)- E9-16 (OC1+) C2-2 (OCV)- E9-15 (OC1-) Below 1 ohms
      C2-1 C2-2 (OCV) or E9-16 (OC1+) - Body ground (OCV) or E9-15 (OC1-) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (OPERATE OCV)
    1. Start the engine and warm it up.
    2. Disconnect the OCV connector.
    3. Apply battery positive voltage to the terminals of the OCV.
    4. Check the engine speed.

      Fig. 49: Identifying OCV Connector Terminals (Wire Hardness Side)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Rough idle or engine stalled.

    1. NG: REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK ECM (OCV SIGNAL)
    1. During idling, check the waveform of the ECM connector using an oscilloscope.

      Fig. 50: Identifying E9 ECM Connector Terminal & OCV Signal Waveform
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION & AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-16 (OC1+) - E9-15 (OC1-) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (OCV - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the C2 OCV connector.
    2. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 51: Identifying ECM And C2 OCV Connector Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION & AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      C2-1 (OCV)- E9-16 (OC1+) C2-2 (OCV)- E9-15 (OC1-) Below 1 ohms
      C2-1 C2-2 (OCV) or E9-16 (OC1+) - Body ground (OCV) or E9-15 (OC1-) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

DTC P0011, P0012: CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" (BANK 1)

  • DTC P0011: CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" -TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK1)
  • DTC P0012 CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" -TIMING OVER-RETARDED (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to wiring in DTC P0010 CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1).

Fig. 52: Diagnostic Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0011/0012)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM optimizes the valve timing using the Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system to control the intake valve camshaft. The VVT system includes the ECM, the Oil Control Valve (OCV) and the VVT controller. The ECM sends a target "duty-cycle" control signal to the OCV. This control signal, applied to the OCV, regulates the oil pressure supplied to the VVT controller. The VVT controller can advance or retard the intake valve camshaft.

Example:

A DTC will set if: 1) the difference between the target and actual valve timing is more than 5 degrees of the camshaft angle (CA) and the condition continues for more than 4.5 seconds; or 2) the OCV is forcibly activated 63 times or more.

Advanced cam DTCs are subject to "1 trip" detection logic.

Retarded cam DTCs are subject to "2 trip" detection logic.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 53: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Battery voltage 11 V or more
Engine RPM 550 to 4,000 rpm
ECT 75 to 100°C (167 to 212°F

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Difference between "target" and "actual" camshaft timing More than 5°CA (Crankshaft Angle)
Camshaft timing change for 5 sec. Within 5°CA

If the difference between "target" and "actual" camshaft timing is larger than the specified value, the ECM operates the VVT actuator.

Then, the ECM monitors the camshaft timing change for 5 seconds.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0010 CAMSHAFT POSITION "A" ACTUATOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1).

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Abnormal bank Problem of advanced OCV Problem of retarded OCV
Bank1 P0011 P0012

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester:

  1. CHECK VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. Check for loose or jumped tooth of timing chain.

      OK: The matchmarks of the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are alined.

    1. NG: ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND-HELD TESTER (OPERATE OF OCV)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Start the engine and warm it up.
    3. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester main switch.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/VVT CTRL B1.
    5. Using the hand-held tester, operate the OCV and check the engine speed.

      Standard:

      TESTER OPERATION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Operation Specified Condition
      OCV is OFF Normal engine speed
      OCV is ON Rough idle or engine stall

    1. NG: Go to step 4
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK IF PTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR
    1. Erase the DTC(s) using one of the following methods: 1) use the hand-held tester, 2) disconnect the battery cable for more than 60 seconds, or 3) remove the EFI NO. 1 and ETCS fuses for more than 60 seconds.

      HINT:

      After disconnecting the battery cable, perform the "INITIALIZE" procedure (See INITIALIZATION ).

    2. Start and warm up the engine.
    3. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes or more.
    4. Read output DTC using the hand-held tester.

      OK: No DTC is output.

    1. OK: VVT SYSTEM OK*

      HINT:

      *: DTCs P0011 and P0012 are output when a foreign object in the engine oil enters the system. These codes will stay even if the system returns to normal after a short time. Foreign objects are filtered out by the oil filter.

    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK ECM (OCV SIGNAL)
    1. During idling, check the waveform of the ECM connector using an oscilloscope.

      Fig. 54: Identifying E9 ECM Terminals & OCV Signal Waveform
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-16 (OC1+) - E9-15 (OC1-) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER

    OK: The filter is not clogged.

    1. NG: REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (OCV) (See INSPECTION )

    OK: OCV has no contamination and moves smoothly.

    1. OK: Go to step 8
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (OCV)
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )

    OK: Camshaft timing gear rotates smoothly when pressure is applied.

    1. OK: Go to step 10
  9. REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. CHECK FOR BLOCKAGE (OCV, OIL CHECK VALVE AND OIL HOLE)

    OK: No blockage

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR
    1. Erase the DTC(s) using one of the following methods: 1) use the hand-held tester, 2) disconnect the battery cable for more than 60 seconds, or 3) remove the EFI NO. 1 and ETCS fuses for more than 60 seconds.

      HINT:

      After disconnecting the battery cable, perform the "INITIALIZE" procedure (See INITIALIZATION ).

    2. Start and warm up the engine.
    3. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes or more.
    4. Read output DTC using the hand-held tester.

    OK: No DTC is output.

    1. OK: VVT SYSTEM OK*

      HINT:

      *: DTCs P0011 and P0012 are output when a foreign object in the engine oil enters the system. These codes will stay even if the system returns to normal after a short time. Foreign objects are filtered out by the oil filter.

    2. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. CHECK VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. Check for loose or jumped tooth of timing chain.

      OK: The matchmarks of the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are alined.

    1. NG: ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT OPERATION OF OCV
    1. Start the engine.
    2. Check the engine speed with (1) and (2).
      1. Disconnect the C2 OCV connector.
      2. Apply battery positive voltage between the terminals of the OCV.

        Fig. 55: Identifying C2 OCV Connector Terminal
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Result:

        ENGINE SPEED CHECKING
        Proceed to Check (1) Check (2)
        A Normal engine speed Rough idle or engine stall
        B Conditions other than A Conditions other than A

    1. B: Go to step 4
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR
    1. Erase the DTC(s) using one of the following methods: 1) use the hand-held tester, 2) disconnect the battery cable for more than 60 seconds, or 3) remove the EFI NO. 1 and ETCS fuses for more than 60 seconds.

      HINT:

      After disconnecting the battery cable, perform the "INITIALIZE" procedure (See INITIALIZATION ).

    2. Start and warm up the engine.
    3. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes or more.
    4. Read output DTC using the hand-held tester.

    OK: No DTC is output.

    1. OK: VVT SYSTEM OK*

      HINT:

      *: DTCs P0011 and P0012 are output when a foreign object in the engine oil enters the system. These codes will stay even if the system returns to normal after a short time. Foreign objects are filtered out by the oil filter.

    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK ECM (OCV SIGNAL)
    1. During idling, check the waveform of the ECM connector using an oscilloscope.

      Fig. 56: Identifying E9 ECM Terminals & OCV Signal Waveform
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-16 (OC1+) - E9-15 (OC1-) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER

    OK: The filter is not clogged.

    1. NG: REPLACE OIL CONTROL VALVE FILTER
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (OCV) (See INSPECTION )

    OK: OCV has no contamination and moves smoothly.

    1. OK: Go to step 8
    2. NG: Go to next step.
  7. REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING OIL CONTROL VALVE ASSY (OCV)
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )

    OK: Camshaft timing gear rotates smoothly when pressure is applied.

    1. OK: Go to step 10
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING GEAR ASSY
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. CHECK FOR BLOCKAGE (OCV, OIL CHECK VALVE AND OIL HOLE)

    OK: No blockage

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. CHECK IF DTC OUTPUTS REOCCUR
    1. Erase the DTC(s) using one of the following methods: 1) use the hand-held tester, 2) disconnect the battery cable for more than 60 seconds, or 3) remove the EFI NO. 1 and ETCS fuses for more than 60 seconds.

      HINT:

      After disconnecting the battery cable, perform the "INITIALIZE" procedure (See INITIALIZATION ).

    2. Start and warm up the engine.
    3. Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes or more.
    4. Read output DTC using the hand-held tester.

      OK: No DTC is output.

    OK: VVT SYSTEM OK*

    HINT:

    *: DTCs P0011 and P0012 are output when a foreign object in the engine oil enters the system. These codes will stay even if the system returns to normal after a short time. Foreign objects are filtered out by the oil filter.

    1. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
    2. REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0016: CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK 1 SENSOR A)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to wiring in DTC P0335, P0339: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT.

Fig. 57: Diagnostic Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0016)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM optimizes the valve timing using the Variable Valve Timing (VVT) system to control the intake valve camshaft. The VVT system includes the ECM, the Oil Control Valve (OCV) and the VVT controller. The ECM sends a target duty-cycle control signal to the OCV. This control signal, applied to the OCV, regulates the oil pressure supplied to the VVT controller. The VVT controller can advance or retard the intake valve camshaft. The ECM calibrates the valve timing of the VVT system by setting the camshaft to the maximum retard angle when the engine speed is idling. The ECM closes the OCV to retard the cam. The ECM stores this valve as VVT learned value. When the difference between the target valve timing and the actual valve timing is 5 degrees or less, the ECM stores this in its memory.

If the learned value meets both of the following conditions ("a" and "b"), the ECM interprets this as a defect in the VVT system and sets a DTC.

  1. VVT learning value is less than 27°CA or more than 49°CA.
  2. Above condition continues for more than 18 seconds.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0016: Camshaft timing misalignment at Idling
Required sensors/ components (Main) VVT actuator
Required sensors/ components (Related) CMP and CKP sensor
Frequency of operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 60 sec.
MIL operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Camshaft timing Maximum retarded
Duration time of "target valve timing - actual valve timing 0 5°CA" Less than 5 sec.
"Actual" camshaft timing change per 360°CA 1.875°CA or less
Engine RPM 550 to 1,400 rpm

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Either of the following conditions is met:  
"VVT learning value" Less than 27°CA
"VVT learning value" More than 49°CA

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0335, P0339: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. Check for loose or jumped tooth of timing chain.

      OK: The matchmarks of the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are alined.

    1. NG: ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0031, P0032: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

  • DTC P0031: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
  • DTC P0032: OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

HINT:

Although the title (DTC description) says "oxygen sensor", this DTC is related to the "A/F sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to DTC P2195 on DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1).

HINT:

The ECM provides a pulse width modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The A/F sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the +B side of the circuit.

Fig. 58: Oxygen (A/F) Sensor Heater Control Low And High Circuit Diagram (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 59: Diagnostic Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0031/32)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM uses A/F sensor information to keep the air/fuel ratio close to the stoichiometric ratio. This maximizes the catalytic converter's ability to purify exhaust gases. The sensor detects oxygen levels in the exhaust gas and sends this signal to the ECM.

The inner surface of the sensor element is exposed to outside air. The outer surface of the sensor element is exposed to exhaust gas. The sensor element is made of platinum coated zirconia and includes an integrated heating element. The zirconia element generates a small voltage when there is a large difference in the oxygen concentrations of the exhaust and the outside air. The platinum coating amplifies the voltage generation. When heated, the sensor becomes very efficient. If the temperature of the exhaust is low, the sensor will not generate useful voltage signals without supplemental heating. The ECM regulates the supplemental heating using a duty-cycle approach to regulate the average current in the heater element. If the heater current is out of the normal range, the sensor's output signals will be inaccurate and the ECM cannot regulate the A/F ratio properly.

When the heater current is out of the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction and sets a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 60: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

P0031

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P0031)
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Battery voltage Less than 10.5 V
A/F sensor heater duty ratio 50 % or more
Time after engine start 10 sec. or more

P0032

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P0032)
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Time after engine start 10 sec. or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0031

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0031)
A/F sensor heater current Less than 0.8A

P0032

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0032)
A/F sensor heater current More than 10 A

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE
A/F sensor heater current 1.8 to 3.4 A at 20°C (68°F)

MONITOR STATUS

The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in this component can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. This procedure is described under CHECKING MONITOR STATUS ).

TID (Test Identification Data) is assigned to each emission-related component.

  • TLT (Test Limit Type):
  • If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit.
  • If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.
  • CID (Component Identification Data) is assigned to each test value.
  • Unit Conversion is used to calculate the test value indicated on generic OBD scan tools.

TID $07: A/F Sensor Heater

TEST IDENTIFICATION DATA (A/F SENSOR HEATER)
TLT CID Unit Conversion Description of Test Value Description of Test Limit
1 $01 Multiply by 0.00017 (A) Maximum A/F sensor heater current (bank 1) Malfunction criterion

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1).

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the A/F sensor.

      Fig. 61: Identifying A/F Sensor Connector Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 (HT) - 2 (+B) 20°C (68°F) 1.8 to 3.4 ohms
      1 (HT) - 4 (AF-) - 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 62: Identifying Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK ECM (HA1A VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 63: Identifying ECM E8 & E9 Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E8-5 (HA1A) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - A/F SENSOR, A/F SENSOR - EFI RELAY)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and A/F sensor.
      1. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
      2. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 64: Identifying ECM E8 & A/F Sensor Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

        TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
        Tester Connection Specified Condition
        A6-1 (HT)- E8-5 (HA1A) Below 1 ohms
        A6-1 (HT) or E8-5 (HA1 A) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the A/F sensor and EFI relay.
      1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
      2. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 65: Identifying A/F Sensor Connector Terminals & EFI Relay Location
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

        TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
        Tester Connection Specified Condition
        A6-2 (+B) - J/B EFI relay terminal 3 Below 1 ohms
        A6-2 (+B) or J/B EFI relay terminal 3 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0037, P0038: OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2),

  • DTC P0037: OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
  • DTC P0038: OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to DTC P0136 on DTC P0136, P0137, P0138: OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2).

HINT:

The ECM provides a pulse width a modulated control circuit to adjust current through the heater. The oxygen sensor heater circuit uses a relay on the +B side of the circuit.

Fig. 66: Oxygen Sensor Heater Circuit Diagram (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 67: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0037/38)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The sensing portion of the heated oxygen sensor has a zirconia element which is used to detect oxygen concentration in the exhaust. If the zirconia element is at the proper temperature and difference of the oxygen concentration between the inside and outside surface of sensor is large, the zirconia element will generate voltage signals. In order to increase the oxygen concentration detecting capacity in the zirconia element, the ECM supplements the heat from the exhaust with heat from a heating element inside the sensor. When current in the sensor is out of the standard operating range, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the heated oxygen sensor and sets a DTC.

Example:

The ECM will set a high current DTC if the current in the sensor is more than 2 A when the heater is OFF. Similarly, the ECM will set a low current DTC if the current is less than 0.25 A when the heater is ON.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 68: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

P0037:

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Either of the following conditions A and B are met:  
Conditions A The following conditions (a), (b) and (c) are met.
(a) Time after engine start 250 to 500 sec.
(b) Vehicle speed Below 56 mph (90 km/h)
(c) Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Pass or Fail detection in this driving cycle None
Conditions B The following conditions (a), (b) and (c) are met.
(a) Time after engine start 500 sec. or more
(b) Vehicle speed 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
(c) Battery voltage 10.5 V or more

P0038 None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0037

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0037)
HO2S heater current when HO2S heater OFF Less than 0.25 A (when battery voltage is 11.5 V or more)

P0038

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0038)
HO2S heater current when HO2S heater ON More than 2 A

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE
HO2S heater current 0.4 to 1 A (when engine is idle, warmed-up and battery voltage is 11 to 14 V)

MONITOR STATUS

The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in this component can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. This procedure is described under CHECKING MONITOR STATUS).

  • TID (Test Identification Data) is assigned to each emission-related component.
  • TLT (Test Limit Type):
  • If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit.
  • If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.
  • CID (Component Identification Data) is assigned to each test value.
  • Unit Conversion is used to calculate the test value indicated on generic OBD scan tools.

TID $04: HO2S Heater

TEST IDENTIFICATION DATA (HO2S HEATER)
TLT CID Unit Conversion Description of Test Value Description of Test Limit
1 $02 Multiply by 0.000076 (A) Maximum HO2S heater current (bank 1 sensor 2) Malfunction criterion

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0136, P0137, P0138: OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2).

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the H10 heated oxygen sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the heated oxygen sensor terminals.

      Fig. 69: Identifying Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      H10-2 (HT) - H10-1 (+B) 20°C (68°F) 11 to 16 kohms
      H10-2 (HT) - H10-1 (+B) 800°C (1,472°F) 23 to 32 kohms

    1. NG: REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    2. OK: Go to next Step.
  2. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 70: Identifyiing EFI Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM (HT1B VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 71: Identifying ECM E8 E9 Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E8-21 (HT1B) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR, HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR - EFI RELAY)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and heated oxygen sensor.
      1. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
      2. Disconnect the H10 heated oxygen sensor connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 72: Identifying E8 ECM & Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

        TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
        Tester Connection Specified Condition
        H10-2 (HT)- E8-21 (HT1B) Below 1 ohms
        H10-2 (HT) or E8-21 (HT1B) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the heated oxygen sensor and EFI relay.
      1. Disconnect the H10 heated oxygen sensor connector.
      2. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 73: Identifying Heated Oxygen Sensor Connector Terminals & EFI Engine Relay Location
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

        TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
        Tester Connection Specified Condition
        H10-1 (+B) - J/B EFI relay terminal 3 Below 1 ohms
        H10-1 (+B) or J/B EFI relay terminal 3 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0100, P0102, P0103: MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0100: MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
  • DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter measures the amount of air flowing through the throttle valve. The ECM uses this information to determine the fuel injection time and provide a proper air fuel ratio. Inside the MAF meter, there is a heated platinum wire exposed to the flow of intake air.

By applying a specific current to the wire, the ECM heats this wire to a given temperature. The flow of incoming air cools the wire and an internal thermistor, affecting their resistance. To maintain a constant current value, the ECM varies the voltage applied to these components in the MAF meter. The voltage level is proportional to the airflow through the sensor. The ECM interprets this voltage as the intake air amount.

The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and temperature sensor provide a bridge circuit, with the power transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature.

Fig. 74: Mass Air Flow Meter Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 75: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0100/0102/0103)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

After confirming DTC P0100, P0102 or P0103, use the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to confirm the MAF ratio from the ALL menu (to reach the ALL menu: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL).

Fig. 76: Malfunctioning Detection Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

If there is a defect in the sensor or an open or short circuit, the voltage level will deviate outside the normal operating range. The ECM interprets this deviation as a defect in the MAF meter and sets a DTC.

Example:

When the sensor voltage output is less than 0.2 V or more than 4.9 V and if either condition continues for more than 3 seconds.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 77: Monitor Strategy
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not None present None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0100:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0100)
MAF meter voltage Less than 0.2 V or more than 4.9 V

P0102:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0102)
MAF meter voltage Less than 0.2 V

P0103:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0103)
MAF meter voltage More than 4.9 V

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE
MAF meter voltage Between 0.4 and 2.2 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 78: Mass Air Flow Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (MAF RATE)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Start the engine.
    3. Push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    4. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/MAF. Read the values.

      Result:

      HAND HELD TESTER RESULT (MAF RATE)
      Air Flow Rate (gm/second) Proceed to
      0.0 A
      271.0 or more B
      MAF rate greater than 1 but less than 270.0 (1) C
      (1) The value must change when the throttle valve is opened or closed.

    HINT:

    *: The value must change when the throttle valve is opened or closed.

    1. B: Go to step 6
    2. C: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW METER (POWER SOUCE VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    3. Measure the voltage of the wire harness side connector.

      Fig. 79: Identifying MAF Meter Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      M1-1 (+B) - Body ground 9 to 14 V

    1. NG: Go to step 5
    2. OK: Go to next Step.
  3. INSPECT ECM (VG VOLTAGE)
    1. Start the engine.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 80: Identifying E7 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      E7-30 (VG) - E7-29 (EVG) Engine is idling 0.5 to 3.0 V

      HINT:

      The shift position should be P or N and the A/C switch should be turned OFF.

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (MAF METER - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 81: Identifying MAF Meter And ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      M1-3 (VG)- E7-30 (VG) M1-2 (EVG)- E7-29 (EVG) Below 1 ohms
      M1-3 (VG) or E7-30 (VG) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
  5. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (MAF METER - EFI RELAY)
    1. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    2. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 82: Identifying MAF Meter Connector Terminals And EFI Relay Location
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      M1-1 (+B) - J/B EFI relay terminal 3 Below 1 ohms
      M1-1 (+B) or J/B EFI relay terminal 3 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: INSPECT ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT)
  6. INSPECT ECM (SENSOR GROUND)
    1. Measure the resistance of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 83: Identifying E7 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E7-29 (EVG) - Body ground Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (MAF METER - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 84: Identifying MAF Meter And E7 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      M1-3 (VG)- E7-30 (VG) M1-2 (EVG)- E7-29 (EVG) Below 1 ohms
      M1-3 (VG) or E7-30 (VG) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER

DTC P0101: MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to DTC P0100 on DTC P0100 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT.

Fig. 85: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0101)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter helps the ECM calculate the amount of air flowing through the throttle valve. The ECM uses this information to determine the fuel injection time and provide a proper air fuel ratio. Inside the MAF meter, there is a heated platinum wire exposed to the flow of intake air. By applying a specific current to the wire, the ECM heats this wire to a given temperature. The flow of incoming air cools the wire and an internal thermistor, affecting their resistance. To maintain a constant current value, the ECM varies the voltage applied to these components in the MAF meter. The voltage level is proportional to the air flow through the sensor. The ECM interprets this voltage as the intake air amount. If there is a defect in the sensor or an open or short circuit, the voltage level will deviate from the normal operating range. The ECM interprets this deviation as a defect in the MAF meter and sets a DTC.

Example: If the voltage is more than 2.2 V at idle or less than 0.4 V at idle off, the ECM interprets this as a defect in the MAF meter and sets a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0101: MAF meter rationality
Required sensors/ components (Main) MAF meter
Required sensors/ components (Related) CKP sensor, ECT sensor, TP sensor
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 10 sec.
MIL operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR

MAF Meter Rationality (Case 1):

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS - MAF METER RATIONALITY (CASE 1)
Engine RPM Less than 900 rpm
Idle ON
ECT 70°C (158°F) or more

MAF Meter Rationality (Case 2):

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS - MAF METER RATIONALITY (CASE 2)
Engine RPM 1,500 rpm or more
TP voltage 0.63 V or more

MAF Meter Rationality (Case 3):

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS - MAF METER RATIONALITY (CASE 3)
Engine RPM 0 rpm or more
TP voltage 0.1 V

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

MAF Meter Rationality (Case 1):

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS - MAF METER RATIONALITY (CASE 1)
MAF meter voltage More than 2.2 V

MAF Meter Rationality (Case 2):

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS - MAF METER RATIONALITY (CASE 2)
MAF meter voltage Below 1 V

MAF Meter Rationality (Case 3):

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS - MAF METER RATIONALITY (CASE 3)
MAF meter voltage Less than 0.4 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0100 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0101)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P0101 and other DTCs are output A
      Only P0101 is output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides P0101 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those codes first.

    1. B: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
    2. A: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)

DTC P0110, P0112, P0113: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0110: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0112: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
  • DTC P0113: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, mounted on the Mass Air Flow (MAF) meter, monitors the intake air temperature. The IAT sensor has a thermistor that varies its resistance depending on the temperature of the intake air. When the air temperature is low, the resistance in the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. The variations in resistance are reflected as voltage changes to the ECM terminal (see Fig. 86).

The IAT sensor is connected to the ECM (see below). The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the IAT sensor from terminal THA via resistor R.

That is, the resistor R and the IAT sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the IAT sensor changes in accordance with changes in the IAT, the voltage at terminal THA also changes. Based on this signal, the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability during cold engine operation.

Fig. 86: Temperature-To-Resistance Graph
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 87: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0110/0112/0113)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

After confirming DTC P0110, P0112 or P0113, use the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to confirm the IAT from the ALL menus (to reach the ALL menu: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL).

DTC MALFUNCTIONING
Temp. Displayed Malfunction
-40 °C (-40 °F) Open circuit
140°C (284°F) or more Short circuit

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the intake air temperature. When the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the IAT sensor and sets a DTC.

Example:

When the sensor voltage output is -40°C (-40°F), or more than 140°C (284°F) and if either condition continues 0.5 seconds or more.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 88: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not None present

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0110

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0110)
IAT sensor resistance Less than 98.5 ohms or more than 156 kohms

P0112

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0112)
IAT sensor resistance [IAT] Less than 98.5 ohms. [More than 140°C (284°F)]

P0113

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0113)
IAT sensor resistance [IAT] More than 156 kohms [-40°C (-40°F)]

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE
IAT sensor resistance [IAT] 98.5 ohms to 156 kohms[-39 to 140°C (-40 to 284°F)]

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 89: IAT Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • If DTCs that are related to different systems are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may have an open circuit.
  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/INTAKE AIR. Read the values.

      Temperature: The same as actual intake air temperature.

      Result:

      IAT DISPLAY
      Display Proceed to
      -40 °C (-40 °F) A
      140°C (284°F) or more B
      OK (same as present temperature) C

      HINT:

      • If there is an open circuit, the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool indicates -40°C (-40°F).
      • If there is a short circuit, the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool indicates 140°C (284°F) or more.
    1. B: Go to step 4
    2. C: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR OPEN IN HARNESS)
    1. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    2. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the M1 MAF meter wire harness side connector.
    3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    4. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/INTAKE AIR. Read the values.

      Fig. 90: Connecting MAF Harness Connector Terminals THA And E2
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more

    1. OK: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER (IAT SENSOR)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM)
    1. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    2. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the E7 ECM connector.

      HINT:

      Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector.

    3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    4. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/INTAKE AIR. Read the values.

      Fig. 91: Connecting E7 ECM Connector Terminals THA And E2
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR
    2. NG: CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
  4. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR SHORT IN HARNESS)
    1. Disconnect the M1 MAF meter connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/INTAKE AIR. Read the values.

      Fig. 92: Disconnecting MAF Meter Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: -40°C (-40°F)

    1. OK: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM)
    1. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/INTAKE AIR. Read the values.

      Fig. 93: Disconnecting ECM Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: -40°C (-40°F)

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR
    2. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0115, P0117, P0118: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0115: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
  • DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

A thermistor is built in the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature.

The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor.

HINT:

If the ECM detects the DTC P0115, P0117 or P0118, it operates the fail-safe function in which the ECT is assumed to be 80°C (176°F).

Fig. 94: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0115/0117/0118)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

After confirming DTC P0115, P0117 or P0118, use the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to confirm the ECT from the ALL menu (to reach the ALL menu: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL).

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Temperature Displayed Malfunction
-40 °C (-40 °F) Open circuit
140°C (284°F) or more Short circuit

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECT sensor is used to monitor the engine coolant temperature. The ECT sensor has a thermistor that varies its resistance depending on the temperature of the engine coolant. When the coolant temperature is low, the resistance in the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. The variations in resistance are reflected in the voltage output from the sensor.

The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the engine coolant temperature.

When the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the ECT sensor and sets a DTC.

Example:

When the ECM calculates that the ECT is -40°C (-40°F) or more than 140°C (284°F) and if either condition continues 0.5 seconds or more, the ECM will set a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0115: ECT sensor range check (Chattering) P0117: ECT sensor range check (Low resistance) P0118: ECT sensor range check (High resistance)
Required sensors/components (Main) ECT sensor
Required sensors/components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 0.5 sec.
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0115

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0115)
ECT sensor resistance Less than 79 ohms or more than 156 kohms

P0117

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0117)
ECT sensor resistance [ECT] Less than 79 ohms [More than 140°C (284°F)]

P0118

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0118)
ECT sensor resistance [ECT] More than 156 kohms [-40°C (-40°F)]

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE
ECT sensor resistance [ECT] 79 ohms to 156 Kohms [-39 to 140°C (-40 to 284°F)]

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 95: ECT Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • If DTCs that are related to different systems are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may have an open circuit.
  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/COOLANT TEMP. Read the values.

      Temperature: Same value as the actual engine coolant temperature.

      Result:

      ECT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
      Temperature Displayed Proceed to
      -40 °C (-40 °F) A
      140°C (284°F) or more B
      OK (same as present temperature) C

      HINT:

      • If there is an open circuit, the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool indicates -40°C (-40°F).
      • If there is a short circuit, the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool indicates 140°C (284°F) or more.
    1. B: Go to step 4
    2. C: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS)
    1. Disconnect the E2 ECT sensor connector.
    2. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the E2 ECT sensor wire harness side connector.
    3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    4. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/COOLANT TEMP. Read the values.

      Fig. 96: Connecting ECT Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more

    1. OK: CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. IF OK, REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM)
    1. Disconnect the E2 ECT sensor connector.
    2. Connect terminals THW and E2 of the E7 ECM connector.

      HINT:

      Before checking, do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector.

    3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    4. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/COOLANT TEMP. Read the values.

      Fig. 97: Identifying ECM and ECT Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: 140°C (284°F) or more

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. NG: CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. IF OK, REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
  4. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
    1. Disconnect the E2 ECT sensor connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/COOLANT TEMP. Read the values.

      Fig. 98: Disconnecting ECT Sensor Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: -40°C (-40°F)

    1. OK: REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM)
    1. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/COOLANT TEMP. Read the values.

      Fig. 99: Disconnecting ECM Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Temperature value: -40°C (-40°F)

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0116: ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to DTC P0115 on DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT.

Fig. 100: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0116)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is used to monitor the engine coolant temperature. The ECT sensor has a thermistor that varies its resistance depending on the temperature of the engine coolant. When the coolant temperature is low, the resistance in the thermistor increases. When the temperature is high, the resistance drops. The variations in resistance are reflected in the voltage output from the sensor. The ECM monitors the sensor voltage and uses this value to calculate the engine coolant temperature. When the sensor output voltage deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the ECT sensor and sets a DTC.

Examples:

  1. Upon starting the engine, the ECT is between 35°C (95°F) and 60°C (140°F). If, after driving for 250 seconds, the ECT still remains within 3°C (5.4°F) of the starting temperature, a DTC will be set (2 trip detection logic).
  2. Upon starting the engine, the ECT is over 60°C (140°F). If, after driving for 250 seconds, the ECT still remains within 1 °C (1.8°F) of the starting temperature, a DTC will be set (6 trip detection logic).

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 101: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present P0100 to P0103: MAF meter

ECT Sensor Stuck at Low ECT:

TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS (ECT SENSOR STUCK AT LOW ECT)
Cumulative idle off period 250 sec. or more
Speed increase by 30 km/h (19 mph) or more 10 times or more
ECT 35 to 60°C (95 to 140°F)
IAT -6.7°C (20°F) or more

ECT Sensor Stuck at High ECT:

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (ECT SENSOR STUCK AT HIGH ECT)
ECT 60°C (140°F) or more
IAT -6.7°C (20°F) or more
"Stop and go (1) Once or more
"Steady driving and stop (2) Once or more
(1) Vehicle is stopped for 20 second or more and accelerated to more than 44 mph (70 km/h) within 40 second.

(2) Vehicle is driven by 40 mph (65 km/h) or more for 30 second or more and the vehicle speed reaches 44 mph (70 km/h). The vehicle is decelerated from 40 mph (65 km/h) to 2 mph (3 km/h) or less within 35 sec and stopped for 10 second.

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

ECT Sensor Stuck at Low ECT:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (ECT SENSOR STUCK AT LOW ECT)
ECT change Less than 3°C (5.4°F)

ECT sensor Stuck at High ECT:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (ECT SENSOR STUCK AT HIGH ECT)
ECT change 1°C (1.8°F) or less

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
ECT Varies with actual ECT (Engine coolant temperature)

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • If DTCs P0115, P0116, P0117, P0118 and P0125 are output simultaneously, the ECT sensor circuit may be open or shorted. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC P0115, P0117 or P0118 first.
  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR I

DTC P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0223, P2135: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0120: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A" CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A" CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
  • DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A" CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
  • DTC P0220 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "B" CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "B" CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
  • DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A/B" VOLTAGE CORRELATION

HINT:

This is the purpose of the "throttle position sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

HINT:

  • This Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) does not use a throttle cable.
  • This throttle position sensor is a non-contact type.

The throttle position sensor is mounted on the throttle body and it detects the opening angle of the throttle valve. This sensor is electronically controlled and uses Hall-effect elements, so that accurate control and reliability can be obtained. The throttle position sensor has 2 sensor elements/signal outputs: VTA1 and VTA2. VTA1 is used to detect the throttle opening angle and VTA2 is used to detect malfunctions in VTA1. Voltage applied to VTA1 and VTA2 change between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the throttle valve. There are several checks that the ECM performs to confirm proper operation of the throttle position sensor and VTA1.

The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals input from terminals VTA1 and VTA2, and the ECM controls the throttle motor to make the throttle valve angle properly in response to driver inputs.

Fig. 102: Identifying Throttle Position Sensor Circuits
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 103: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0223, P2135)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

  • After confirming DTCs, use the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to confirm the throttle valve opening percentage and closed throttle position switch condition.
  • "THROTTLE POS" is the VTA1 signal. "THROTTLE POS #2" is the VTA2 signal.

Reference (Normal condition):

TESTER DISPLAY AND ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SPECIFICATIONS
Tester display Accelerator pedal fully released Accelerator pedal fully depressed
THROTTLE POS 10 to 24% 64 to 96 %
THROTTLE POS #2 2.1 to 3.1 V 4.5 to 5.5 V

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM uses the throttle position sensor to monitor the throttle valve opening angle.

  1. There is a specific voltage difference expected between VTA1 and VTA2 for each throttle opening angle.
    • If the difference between VTA1 and VTA2 is incorrect, the ECM interprets this as a fault and will set a DTC.
  2. VTA1 and VTA2 each have a specific voltage operating range.
    • If VTA1 or VTA2 is out of the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a fault and will set a DTC.
  3. VTA1 and VTA2 should never be close to the same voltage levels.
    • If VTA1 is within 0.02 V of VTA2, the ECM interprets this as a short circuit in the throttle position sensor system and will set a DTC.

FAIL-SAFE

If the Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) has a malfunction, the ECM cuts off current to the throttle control motor. The throttle control valve returns to a predetermined opening angle (approximately 16°) by the force of the return spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle to enable the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and slowly, the vehicle can be driven slowly. If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 104: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0120:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0120)
VTA1 voltage 0.2 V or less or 4.8 V or more

P0122

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0122)
VTA1 voltage 0.2 V or less

P0123

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0123)
VTA1 voltage 4.8 V or more

P0220

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0220)
VTA2 voltage 0.5 V or less or 4.8 V or more

P0222

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0222)
VTA2 voltage 0.5 V or less

P0223

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0223)
VTA2 voltage when the VTA1 is 0.2 to 1.8 V 4.8 V or more

P2135

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2135)
Either of the following condition(s) is met: Condition A or B
Condition A
Difference between VTA1 and VTA2 voltage 0.02 V or less
Condition B
VTA1 voltage 0.2 V or less
VTA2 voltage 0.5 V or less

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
VTA1 voltage 0.6 to 3.96 V
VTA2 voltage 2.25 to 4.8 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 105: Throttle Position Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • If DTCs that are related to different systems are output simultaneously while terminal E2 is used as a ground terminal, terminal E2 may have an open circuit.
  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester:

  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (THROTTLE POS AND THROTTLE POS #2)
    1. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/THROTTLE POS and THROTTLE POS #2. Read the values.

      Result:

      Fig. 106: Hand Held Tester Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 5
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the T13 throttle position sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 107: Identifying Throttle Position Sensor and ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 108: Throttle Position Sensor Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM (VC VOLTAGE^
    1. Disconnect the T13 throttle position sensor connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 109: Identifying E7 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E7-18 (VC) - E7-28 (E2) 4.5 to 5.5 V

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. READ OUTPUT PTC (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Start the engine.
    3. Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds or more.
    4. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0222, P0223 and/or P2135 are output again A
      No DTC output B

    1. B: SYSTEM OK
    2. A: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the T13 throttle position sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 110: Identifying Throttle Position Sensor And ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 111: Throttle Position Sensor Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT ECM (VC VOLTAGE)
    1. Disconnect the T13 throttle position sensor connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 112: Identifying E7 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E7-18 (VC) - E7-28 (E2) 4.5 to 5.5 V

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. READ OUTPUT DTC (THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Start the engine.
    3. Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds or more.
    4. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P0120, P0122, P0123, P0220, P0222, P0223 and/or P2135 are output again A
      No DTC output B

    1. B: SYSTEM OK
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
    3. REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0121: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A" CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

HINT:

This is the purpose of the "throttle position sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to DTC P0120 on DTC P0120 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "A" CIRCUIT.

Fig. 113: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0121)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM uses the throttle position sensor to monitor the throttle valve opening angle.

This sensor includes 2 signals: VTA1 and VTA2. VTA1 is used to detect the throttle opening angle and VTA2

is used to detect malfunctions in VTA1. There are several checks that the ECM performs to confirm proper operation of the throttle position sensor and VTA1.

There is a specific voltage difference expected between VTA1 and VTA2 for each throttle opening angle.

If the voltage output difference of the VTA1 and VTA2 deviates from the normal operating range, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the throttle position sensor. The ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC is set.

FAIL-SAFE

If the Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) has a malfunction, the ECM cuts off current to the throttle control motor. The throttle control valve returns to a predetermined opening angle (approximately 16°) by the force of the return spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle to enable the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and slowly, the vehicle can be driven slowly. If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0121: TP (Throttle position) sensor rationality
Required sensors/components (Main) TP sensor
Required sensors/components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 2 sec.
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following present DTCs are not None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Either of the following conditions is met:  
Difference in learning voltage value of (VTA1 - VTA2x0.8) Less than 0.8 V or more than 1.6V

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

REPLACE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0125: INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to DTC P0115 on DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT.

Fig. 114: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0125)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is used to monitor the temperature of the engine coolant. The resistance of the sensor varies with the actual coolant temperature. The ECM applies a voltage to the sensor and the varying resistance of the sensor causes the signal voltage to vary. The ECM monitors the ECT signal voltage after engine start-up. If, after sufficient time has passed, the sensor still reports that the engine is not warm enough for closed-loop fuel control, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the sensor or cooling system and sets a DTC.

Example:

The ECT is 0°C (32°F) at engine start. After 5 minutes running time, the ECT sensor still indicates that the engine is not warm enough to begin active feedback control of the air-fuel ratio. The ECM interprets this as a fault in the sensor or cooling system and will set a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 115: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Fuel cut OFF
Engine Running
Idle OFF

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

Fig. 116: Typical Malfunction Thresholds Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • If DTCs P0115, P0116, P0117, P0118 and P0125 are output simultaneously, engine coolant temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC P0115, P0117 or P0118 first.
  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0125)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      Only P0125 are output A
      P0125 and other DTCs are output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides P0125 is output, perform the troubleshooting for those codes first.

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT THERMOSTAT (See INSPECTION )
    1. Check the valve opening temperature of the thermostat.

      OK: Valve opening temperature: 80 to 84°C (176 to 183°F)

    HINT:

    Also check that the valve is completely closed under opening temperature as above.

    1. NG: REPLACE THERMOSTAT (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
    1. Check the cooling system for excessive cooling, such as abnormal radiator fan operation, modified cooling system and other defects.

      OK: There is no modification of cooling system.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE COOLING SYSTEM
    2. OK: REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

DTC P0128: COOLANT THERMOSTAT (COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

This DTC is output when the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) does not reach 75°C (167°F) despite sufficient engine warm-up time.

Fig. 117: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0128)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Fig. 118: Engine Coolant Temperature And Threshold Graph
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

The ECM estimates the coolant temperature based on starting temperature, engine loads, and engine speeds. The ECM then compares the estimated temperature with the actual ECT. When the estimated coolant temperature reaches 75°C (167°F), the ECM checks the actual ECT. If the actual ECT is less than 75°C (167°F), the ECM will interpret this as a fault in the thermostat or the engine cooling system and set a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0128: Coolant thermostat
Required sensors/components (Main) Thermostat
Required sensors/components (Related) ECT sensor, IAT sensor, VSS
Frequency of operation Once per drive cycle
Duration 900 sec.
MIL operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Battery voltage 11 V or more
Engine start IAT -10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
Engine start ECT -10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
Engine start ECT - engine start IAT -15 to 7°C (-27 to 12.6°F)
Vehicle speed Less than 128 km/h (80 mph)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0113)
Time that both of the following conditions are met: 5 sec. or more
Estimated ECT 75°C (167°F) or more
Actual ECT Less than 75°C (167°F)

MONITOR STATUS

The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in this component can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. This procedure is described in "CHECKING MONITOR STATUS" (see CHECKING MONITOR STATUS).

  • TID (Test Identification Data) is assigned to each emission-related component.
  • TLT (Test Limit Type):

    If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit.

    If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.

  • CID (Component Identification Data) is assigned to each test value. Unit Conversion is used to calculate the test value indicated on generic OBD scan tools.

TID $08: Thermostat

TEST IDENTIFICATION DATA (THERMOSTAT)
TLT CID Unit Conversion Description of Test Value Description of Test Limit
1 $01 Multiply by 0.625 and subtract 40 (°C) ECT sensor output when estimated ECT reaches malfunction criterion Malfunction criterion

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
    1. Check the cooling system for excessive cooling, such as abnormal radiator fan operation, modified cooling system and other defects.
    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE COOLING SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT THERMOSTAT (See INSPECTION )
    1. Check the valve opening temperature of the thermostat.

      OK: Valve opening temperature: 80 to 84°C (176 to 183°F)

    HINT:

    Also check that the valve is completely closed under opening temperature listed.

    1. NG: REPLACE THERMOSTAT (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0136, P0137, P0138: OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

  • DTC P0136: OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
  • DTC P0137 OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)
  • DTC P0138 OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) is used to monitor oxygen in the exhaust gas. For optimum catalyst operation, the air fuel mixture (air-fuel ratio) must be maintained near the ideal "stoichiometric" ratio. The HO2S output voltage changes suddenly in the vicinity of the stoichiometric ratio. The ECM adjusts the fuel injection time so that the air-fuel ratio is nearly stoichiometric.

The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.1 and 0.9 volts in response to oxygen in the exhaust gas. If the oxygen in the exhaust gas increases, the air-fuel ratio becomes "Lean". The ECM interprets Lean when the HO2S voltage is below 0.45 volts. If the oxygen in the exhaust gas decreases, the air-fuel ratio becomes "Rich". The ECM interprets Rich when the HO2S voltage is above 0.45 volts.

Fig. 119: Cross Sectional View Of HO2S
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 120: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0136/0137/0138)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM monitors the rear heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) in the following 3 items:

  1. The HO2S voltage changes between Rich (more than 0.45 volts) and Lean (less than 0.45 volts) while the vehicle is running (repeating acceleration and deceleration) for 8 minutes. If not, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction, illuminates the MIL, and then sets DTC.
  2. The HO2S voltage does not remain at less than 0.05 volts for a long time while the vehicle is running (60 % of the time in the 220 second-monitor, the sensor output is less than 0.05 V). If it does, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction, illuminates the MIL, and then sets a DTC.
  3. The sensor's voltage drops to below 0.2 volts (extremely Lean status) immediately when the vehicle decelerates and the fuel cut is working for 7 seconds. If not, the ECM interprets this to mean the sensor's response feature has deteriorated, illuminates the MIL, and then sets DTC.
  4. The rear oxygen sensor impedance is 5 ohms. or less, 15 kQ. or more, or output voltage is 1.2 V or more (normal voltage: 0 to 1.0 V). If so, the ECM will determine that the rear oxygen sensor or a related circuit has an open or short circuit, illuminate the MIL and set a DTC.

Impedance is detected by the IC inside the ECM.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 121: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

All

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (ALL)
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR

HO2S voltage (P0136)

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (HO2S VOLTAGE)
Engine Running
Either of the following conditions is set:  
Cumulative time while HO2S heater is ON 22 sec. or more
HO2S voltage 0.2 V or more

HO2S voltage during fuel-cut (P0136)

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (HO2S VOLTAGE DURING FUEL CUT)
HO2S voltage before fuel-cut 0.2 V or more
Estimated catalyst temperature 400 to 850°C (752 to 1,562°F)
ECT 70°C (158°F)or more
Fuel-cut Operating

HO2S low voltage (P0136)

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (HO2S LOW VOLTAGE)
Vehicle speed 3 km/h (2 mph) or more
Idle OFF
Fuel-cut OFF (for 5 sec. or more)
Intake air amount per revolution 0.32 g/rev or more
Cumulative time while HO2S heater is ON 80 sec. or more

HO2S low impedance (P0136)

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (HO2S LOW IMPEDANCE)
The following condition is set: 30 sec. or more
Estimated HO2S temperature Less than 800°C (1,472°F) [calculated by intake air amount per revolution]

HO2S high impedance (P0137)

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (HO2S HIGH IMPEDANCE)
The following condition is set: 4 min. or more
Estimated HO2S temperature 450°C or more (842°F) [calculated by intake air amount per revolution]
Intake air amount per revolution More than 0 g/rev

HO2S high voltage (P0138) None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

HO2S voltage (P0136)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S VOLTAGE)
The following condition is set  
Number of Lean/Rich switching 0 time for 320 sec. or more [ECT: 75°C (167°F) or more] 0 time for 480 sec. or more
Lean Minimum HO2S voltage Below 0.45 V
Rich Maximum HO2S voltage 0.6 V or more

HO2S voltage during fuel-cut (P0136)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S VOLTAGE DURING FUEL-CUT)
Time until HO2S voltage drops to 0.2 V during fuel-cut 7 sec. or more

HO2S low voltage (P0136)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S LOW VOLTAGE)
Percentage in monitor time when HO2S voltage is lower than 0.05 V 60 % or more
Percentage in monitor time when HO2S voltage is higher than 0.7 V Within 20 %
Time in monitor time while HO2S voltage is higher is higher than 0.45 V Within 20 sec.
Percentage in monitor time when HO2S voltage is higher than 0.45 V Less than 40 %

HO2S low impedance (P0136)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S LOW IMPEDANCE)
HO2S impedance Less than 5 ohms.

HO2S high impedance (P0137)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S HIGH IMPEDANCE)
HO2S impedance 15 kohms or more

HO2S high voltage (P0138)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S HIGH VOLTAGE)
HO2S voltage 1.2 V or more

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
HO2S voltage Varies between 0.1 and 0.9 V

O2S TEST RESULT

Refer to O2S TEST RESULT for detailed information.

HO2S Output voltage (Minimum and Maximum):

Fig. 122: O2S Test Result Chart (HO2S Output Voltage)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 123: Heated Oxygen Sensor And ECM Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (P0136)

Fig. 124: Identifying Confirmation Driving Pattern (P0136)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
  2. Switch the hand-held tester from normal mode to check (test) mode (see CHECK MODE PROCEDURE).
  3. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine coolant temperature becomes more than 75°C.
  4. Drive the vehicle at 60 km/h (38 mph) or more for 40 seconds or more.
  5. Let the engine idle for 10 seconds or more.
  6. Perform steps (d) to (e) 12 times.

HINT:

If a malfunction exists, the MIL will illuminate during step (f).

NOTE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of a malfunction will not occur. If you do not have a hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps from (c) to (f), then perform steps from (c) to (f) again.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (P0137)

Warm up the engine and run the engine at 60 km/h (38 mph) for 7 minutes.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (P0138)

Warm up the engine and run the engine at idle for 30 seconds.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Hand-held tester only:

It is possible the malfunctioning area can be found using the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation. The A/F CONTROL operation can determine if the A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning or not.

  1. Perform the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation.

    HINT:

    The A/F CONTROL operation lowers the injection volume 12.5 % or increases the injection volume 25 %.

    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL.
    5. Perform the A/F CONTROL operation with the engine idle (press the right or left button).

Result:

A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

+25 % --> rich output: Less than 3.0 V

-12.5 % --> lean output: More than 3.35 V

Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

+25 % --> rich output: More than 0.55 V

-12.5 % --> lean output: Less than 0.4 V

NOTE: The A/F sensor output has a few seconds of delay and the heated oxygen sensor output has about 20 seconds of delay at maximum.

Fig. 125: Hand Held Tester Active Test Result Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables a technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and the heated oxygen sensor.

For displaying the graph, enter "ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA", select "AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2" by pressing "YES" and push "ENTER". Then press "F4".

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P0138 is output A
      P0137 is output B
      P0136 is output C

    HINT:

    If any other codes besides P0136, P0137 and/or P138 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those codes first.

    1. B: Go to step 9
    2. C: Go to step 6
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    3. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/O2S B1S2.
    4. Run the engine at idle.
    5. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor during idling.

    HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
    Heated oxygen sensor output voltage Proceed to
    More than 1.2 V A
    Less than 1.0 V B

    1. B: READ OUTPUT DTC
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (CHECK FOR SHORT)
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 5 minutes.
    2. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 126: Identifying E8 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E8-21 (HT1B) - E8-29 (OX1B) No continuity
      E8-21 (HT1B)- E8-2 (O1B-) No continuity

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (CHECK FOR SHORT)
    1. Disconnect the H10 heated oxygen sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the sensor side connectors.

      Fig. 127: Identifying HO2S Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      H10-1 (+B)- H10-3 (E1) 10 kohms or higher
      H10-1 (+B)- H10-4 (OX) 10 kohms or higher

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. NG: REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
  5. READ OUTPUT PTC (CHECK MODE)
    1. Change the ECM to check mode with the hand-held tester.

      Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/CHECK MODE.

    2. Warm up the engine and drive the vehicle at over 25 mph (40 km/h) for an accumulated total of 10 minutes.

      HINT:

      The 10 minutes of driving should be driven in one instance, but it is not necessary to maintain a speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes consecutively.

    3. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC output) Proceed to
      P0136 is output A
      No DTC B

    1. B: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. A: REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
  6. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR)
    1. After warming up the engine, run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 3 minutes.
    2. Read the output voltage of the heated oxygen sensor when the engine rpm is suddenly increased.

      HINT:

      Quickly accelerate the engine to 4,000 rpm 3 times by using the accelerator pedal.

      Heated oxygen sensor output voltage: Alternates 0.4 V or less and 0.5 V or more.

    1. OK: Go to step 10
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the H10 heated oxygen sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the heated oxygen sensor terminals.

      Fig. 128: Identifying HO2S Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      H10-1 (+B) - H10-2 (HT) 20°C (68°F) 11 to 16 ohms
      H10-1 (+B) - H10-2 (HT) 800°C (1,472°F) 23 to 32 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 129: Identifying EFI Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms(when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. CHECK WIRE HARNESS
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and heated oxygen sensor.
      1. Disconnect the H10 heated oxygen sensor connector.
      2. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 130: Identifying HO2S & ECM Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

        TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
        Tester Connection Specified Condition
        H10-2 (HT)- E8-21 (HT1B) H10-4 (OX)- E8-29 (OX1B) Below 1 ohms
        H10-2 H10-4 (HT) or E8-21 (HT1B) - Body ground (OX) or E8-29 (OX1B) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

        Fig. 131: Bank 1 Sensor 2 System Drawing
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
  10. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern.

  11. READ OUTPUT PTC (PTC P0136 IS OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P0136 is not output again A
      P0136 is output again B

    1. A: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
    2. B: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  12. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  13. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern.

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  14. REAP OUTPUT PTC (PTC P0136 IS OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P0136 is not output again A
      P0136 is output again B

    1. A: REPAIR COMPLETED
    2. B: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  15. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND-HELD TESTER
    1. Start the engine and warm it up.
    2. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    3. Turn ON the ignition switch and the hand-held tester main switch.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/INJ VOL.
    5. Using the hand-held tester, change the injection volume to check the A/F sensor output and heated oxygen sensor output values below.

    HINT:

    Change the injection volume from -12.5 % to +12.5 %.

    Result: A/F sensor output remains more than 3.3 V or A/F sensor output remains less than 3.3 V (Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume)

    Fig. 132: Active Test Graphical Representation
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. NG: CHECK AND REPLACE EXTREMELY RICH OR LEAN ACTUAL AIR FUEL RATIO (INJECTOR, FUEL PRESSURE, GAS LEAKAGE IN EXHAUST SYSTEM, ETC.)

DTC P0171, P0172: SYSTEM LEAN/RICH (BANK 1)

  • DTC P0171: SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
  • DTC P0172: SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The fuel trim is related to the feedback compensation value, not to the basic injection time. The fuel trim includes the short-term fuel trim and the long-term fuel trim.

The short-term fuel trim is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the ideal stoichiometric air-fuel ratio. The signal from the A/F sensor indicates whether the air-fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the stoichiometric air-fuel ratio. This variance triggers a reduction in the fuel volume if the air-fuel ratio is RICH, and an increase in the fuel volume if it is LEAN.

The short-term fuel trim varies from the central value due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the operating environment. The long-term fuel trim, which controls overall fuel compensation, steadies long-term deviations of the short-term fuel trim from the central value. If both the short-term fuel trim and the long-term fuel trim are LEAN or RICH beyond a certain value, it is detected as a malfunction, the MIL is illuminated and a DTC is set.

Fig. 133: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0171/0172)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

  • When DTC P0171 is recorded, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the LEAN side. When DTC P0172 is recorded, the actual air-fuel ratio is on the RICH side.
  • If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the air-fuel ratio is LEAN and DTC P0171 is recorded. The MIL then illuminates.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Fig. 134: Actual Air And Fuel Ratio Graphical Representation At Lean And Rich Side
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Under closed-loop fuel control, fuel injection amounts that deviate from the ECM's estimated fuel amount will cause a change in the long-term fuel trim compensation value. This long-term fuel trim is adjusted when there are persistent deviations in the short-term fuel trim values. And, the deviation from the simulated fuel injection amount by the ECM affects the smoothed fuel trim learning value. The smoothed fuel trim learning value is the combination of smoothed short term fuel trim (fuel feedback compensation value) and smoothed long-term fuel trim (learning value of the air-fuel ratio). When the smoothed fuel trim learning value exceeds the DTC threshold, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the fuel system and sets a DTC.

Example:

The smoothed fuel trim leaning value is more than +34 % or less than -34 %. The ECM interprets this as a failure in the fuel system.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0171: Fuel System Lean P0172: Fuel System Rich
Required sensors/ components (Main) Fuel system
Required sensors / components (Related) A/F sensor, MAF meter, CKP sensor
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 10 sec.
MIL operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Battery voltage 11 V or more
Fuel system Closed Loop (for 13 sec or more)
Warm-up condition to enable air fuel ratio learning control The conditions are met
Either of the following conditions is met:  
Engine RPM Less than 1,100 rpm
Intake air amount 0.22 g/rev or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

Fuel Trim Lean:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (FUEL TRIM LEAN)
Smoothed fuel trim learning value 34 %(1) or more
(1) The threshold value varies with the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT).

Fuel Trim Rich:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (FUEL TRIM RICH)
Smoothed fuel trim learning value -34 % (1) or more
(1) The threshold value varies with the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT).

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1).

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Hand-held tester only: It is possible the malfunctioning area can be found using the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation. The A/F CONTROL operation can determine if the A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning or not.

  1. Perform the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation.

    HINT:

    The A/F CONTROL operation lowers the injection volume 12.5 % or increases the injection volume 25 %.

    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL.
    5. Perform the A/F CONTROL operation with the engine idle (press the right or left button).

Result:

A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

+25 % --> RICH output: Less than 3.0 V

-12.5 % --> LEAN output: More than 3.35 V

Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

+25 % --> RICH output: More than 0.55 V

-12.5 % --> LEAN output: Less than 0.4 V

NOTE: The A/F sensor output has a few seconds of delay and the heated oxygen sensor output has about 20 seconds of delay at maximum.

Fig. 135: Active Test Graphical Representation
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables a technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and the heated oxygen sensor.

For displaying the graph, enter "ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA", select "AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2" by pressing "YES" and push "ENTER". Then press "F4".

HINT:

  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  • A high A/F sensor voltage could be caused by a RICH air fuel mixture. Check the conditions that might cause the engine to run with a RICH air fuel mixture.
  • A low A/F sensor voltage could be caused by a LEAN air fuel mixture. Check the conditions that might cause the engine to run with a LEAN air fuel mixture.
  1. CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    1. Check for vacuum leaks in air induction system.

      OK: No vacuum leak.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK CONNECTION OF PCV HOSE

    OK: PCV hose is connected correctly and PCV hose is not damaged.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (INJECTION AND VOLUME) (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )

    Standard:

    FUEL INJECTOR ASSEMBLY INJECTION VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS
    Injection Volume Difference Between Each Injector
    76 to 91 cm3 (4.6 to 5.5 cu in.) /15 seconds 15 cm3 (0.9 cu in.) or less

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See appropriate Fuel Systems article)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER
    1. Remove the MAF meter.
    2. Check the output voltage.
      1. Apply battery voltage across terminals +B and EVG.
      2. Connect the positive (+) tester probe to terminal VG, and negative (-) tester probe to terminal EVG.
      3. Blow air into the MAF meter, and check that the voltage fluctuates.
    3. Measure the resistance of the IAT terminals.

      Fig. 136: Temperature - Resistance Graph & IAT Terminal Identification
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      4 (THA) - 5 (E2) -20 °C (-4°F) 13.6 to 18.4 kohms
      4 (THA) - 5 (E2) 20°C (68°F) 2.21 to 2.69 kohms
      4 (THA) - 5 (E2) 60°C (140°F) 0.49 to 0.67 kohms

    1. NG: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (RESISTANCE)
    1. Remove the ECT sensor.
    2. Measure the resistance of the ECT sensor terminals.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 - 2 20°C (68°F) 2.32 to 2.59 kohms
      1 - 2 80°C (176°F) 0.310 to 0.326 kohms

    NOTE: When checking the ECT sensor in water, be careful not to allow water to go into the terminals. After the check, dry the sensor.

    HINT:

    Alternate procedure: Connect an ohmmeter to the installed ECT sensor and read the resistance. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the engine temperature in the immediate vicinity of the sensor. Compare these values to the resistance/temperature graph. Change the engine temperature (warm up or allow to cool down) and repeat the test.

    Fig. 137: Measuring ECT Sensor Resistance
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK FOR SPARK AND IGNITION (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )

    OK: Spark occurs.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )
    1. Check the fuel pressure (high or low pressure).

      Standard:

      FUEL PRESSURE CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Item Specified Condition
      Fuel pressure 304 to 343 kPa (3.1 to 3.5 kgf/cm2 , 44 to 55 psi)

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKS

    OK: No gas leak.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE POINT (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (BANK 1 SENSOR 1))
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Warm up the A/F sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    3. Read A/F sensor voltage output on the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.
    4. Hand-held tester only:

      Enter the following menus: ENHANCED OBD II/SNAPSHOT/MANUAL SNAPSHOT/USER DATA.

    5. Select "AFS B1 S1/ENGINE SPD" and press YES.
    6. Monitor the A/F sensor voltage carefully.
    7. Check the A/F sensor voltage output under the following conditions:
      1. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
      2. Running the engine at approximately 2,500 rpm (where engine RPM is not suddenly changed).
      3. Raise the engine speed to 4,000 rpm and quickly release the accelerator pedal so that the throttle is fully closed.

        Standard:

        Condition (1) and (2)

        Voltage change of 3.3 V (0.66 V)* (between approximately 3.1 to 3.5 V), as shown in the illustration.

        Condition (3)

        A/F sensor voltage increases to 3.8 V (0.76 V)* or more when fuel is cut during engine deceleration, as shown in the illustration.

        *: Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool.

        Fig. 138: Engine RPM And Air Fuel Sensor Voltage Graphical Representation At Normal And Malfunction Conditions
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    HINT:

    • Whenever the output voltage of the A/F sensor remains at approximately 3.3 V (0.660 V) (Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool) under any condition as well as the above conditions, the A/F sensor may have an open circuit (this will happen also when the A/F sensor heater has an open circuit). See Fig. 138.
    • Whenever the output voltage of the A/F sensor remains at a certain value of approximately 3.8 V (0.76 V) (Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool) or more, or 2.8 V (0.56 V) (Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool) or less under any condition as well as the above conditions, the A/F sensor may have a short circuit. See Fig. 138.
    • The ECM will stop fuel injection (fuel cut) during engine deceleration. This will cause a LEAN condition and should result in a momentary increase in A/F sensor voltage output.
    • The ECM must establish a closed throttle position learned value to perform fuel cut. If the battery terminal has been disconnected, the vehicle must be driven over 10 mph (16 km/h) to allow the ECM to learn the closed throttle position.
    • When the vehicle is driven:
    • You may notice that the output voltage of the A/F sensor is below 2.8 V (0.76 V) (Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool) during fuel enrichment. For example, when the vehicle tries to overtake another vehicle on a highway, the vehicle speed is suddenly increased with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. The A/F sensor is functioning normally-
    • The A/F sensor is a current output element, and therefore the current is converted into voltage inside the ECM. If measuring voltage at connectors of A/F sensor or ECM, you will observe a constant voltage.
    1. OK: Go to step 17
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the A/F sensor terminals.

      Fig. 139: Identifying AF Sensor Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 (HT) - 2 (+B) 20°C (68°F) 0.8 to 1.4 kohms
      1 (HT) - 2 (+B) 800°C (1,472°F 1.8 to 3.2 kohms

    1. NG: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 140: Identifying EFI Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  12. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (A/F SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 141: Identifying AF Sensor And ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      A6-3 (AF+) -A6-4 (AF-) -A6-1 (HT) - E8-23 (A1A+) E8-31 (A1A-) E8-5 (HA1A) Below 1 ohms
      A6-3 A6-4 A6-1 (AF+) or E8-23 (A1A+) - Body ground (AF-) or E8-31 (A1A-) - Body ground (HT) or E8-5 (HA1A) - Bodv around 10 kohms or higher

      Fig. 142: Bank 1 Sensor 1 Sytem Drawing
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  14. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    Fig. 143: Confirmation Driving Pattern
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Clear the DTCs.
      1. Disconnect the battery cable or remove the EFI NO. 1 and ETCS fuses for 60 seconds or more.
    2. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    3. Switch the hand-held tester from the normal mode to the check mode (see CHECK MODE PROCEDURE).
    4. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessory switches OFF.
    5. Drive the vehicle at 38 to 75 mph (60 to 120 km/h) and engine speed at 1,400 to 3,200 rpm for 3 to 5 minutes.

    HINT:

    If a malfunction exists, the MIL will be illuminated during step (e).

    NOTE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detecting a malfunction may be difficult. If you do not have a hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps (d) to (e), and then do step (e) again.

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  15. READ OUTPUT DTC (DTC P0171, P0172 ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      DTC P0171, P0172 are not output again A
      DTC P0171, P0172 are output again B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT ) AND PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (Refer to step 14)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  16. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
    1. NO: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. YES: DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL (DTCS P0171, P0172)
  17. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern (refer to step 14).

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  18. READ OUTPUT DTC (DTC P0171, P0172 ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      DTC P0171, P0172 are output again A
      DTC P0171, P0172 are not output again B

    1. B: Go to step 22
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  19. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  20. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern (refer to step 14).

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  21. READ OUTPUT PTC (PTC P0171, P0172 ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      DTC P0171, P0172 are not output again A
      DTC P0171, P0172 are output again B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT ) AND PERFORM) CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN/(Refer to step 14)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  22. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
    1. NO: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. YES: DTC IS CAUSED SHORTAGE OF FUEL (DTCS P0171, P0172)

DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304: CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED

  • DTC P0300: RANDOM/MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED
  • DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED
  • DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED
  • DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
  • DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

When a misfire occurs in the engine, hydrocarbons (HC) enter the exhaust in high concentrations. If this HC concentration is high enough, there could be an increase in exhaust emissions levels. High concentration of HC can also cause the temperature of the catalyst to increase, possibly damaging the catalyst. To prevent increases in emissions and limit the possibility of thermal damage, the ECM monitors the misfire rate. When the temperature of the catalyst reaches a point of thermal degradation, the ECM will blink the MIL. For monitoring a misfire, the ECM uses both the camshaft position sensor and the crankshaft position sensor. The camshaft position sensor is used to identify misfiring cylinders and the crankshaft position sensor is us to measure variations in the crankshaft rotation speed. The misfire is counted when crankshaft rotation speed variations exceed threshold values.

If the misfiring rate exceeds the threshold value and could cause emissions deterioration, the ECM illuminates the MIL.

Fig. 144: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC P0300-P0304)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

When several codes for a misfiring cylinder are recorded repeatedly but no random misfire code is recorded, the misfires have been detected and recorded at different times.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Fig. 145: Camshaft And Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

The ECM illuminates the MIL (2 trip detection logic) if:

  • The misfiring rate exceeds a threshold value and could cause emissions deterioration. During the first 1,000 engine revolutions after the engine starts, an excessive misfire rate (approximately 20 to 50 misfire per 1,000 engine revolutions) occurs 1 time.
  • After the first 1,000 engine revolutions after the engine starts, an excessive misfire rate (approximately 20 to 50 misfire per 1,000 engine revolutions) occurs 4 times.

The ECM blinks the MIL (MIL blinks immediately) if:

  • Within 200 engine revolutions at a high rpm, the threshold for "percent of misfire causing catalyst damage" is reached 1 time.
  • Within 200 engine revolutions at a normal rpm, the threshold for "percent of misfire causing catalyst damage" is reached 3 times, (for the 2nd trip, reaching the threshold once will cause the MIL to flash)

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 146: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Battery voltage 8 V more
Engine RPM 400 rpm to allowable RPM limit
All of following (a), and (c) are met  
(a) ECT -10°C (14°F) or more
(b) Either of following conditions are met  
  IAT: -10%C (14°F) or more
  ECT: 75°C (167°F) or more
(c) Either of following condition are met  
  ECT (at engine start): More than -7°C (19°F)
  ECT: More than 20°C (68°F)
MAF 0.172 g/rev or more (Varies with ECT and RPM)
TP Not changing rapidly

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0301 to P0306:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0301 TO P0306)
Misfire counts on each cylinder 17 or more per 1,000 revolutions

Emission-related-misfire:

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (EMISSION-RELATED-MISFIRE *)
Misfire rate 4 % or more

Catalyst damage misfire (MIL flashes immediately):

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (EMISSION-RELATED-MISFIRE *)
Misfire counts 130 or more (1) per 200 1,600 rpm) revolutions (at intake air amount: 0.4 g/rev and engine RPM:
(1) The threshold value varies with the intake air amount and the engine RPM.

HINT:

*:The threshold value varies with the intake air amount and the engine RPM.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL "A" PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT for the wiring diagram of the ignition system.

Fig. 147: Ignition Circuit Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

  1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
  2. Record the DTCs, freeze frame data and misfire counter data.
  3. Set the hand-held tester to check mode (see CHECK MODE PROCEDURE).
  4. Read the value on the misfire counter for each cylinder when idling. If the value is displayed on the misfire counter, skip the following procedure of confirmation driving.
  5. Drive the vehicle several times with the engine speed, load and its surrounding range shown with ENGINE SPD, CALC LOAD in the freeze frame data or MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the DATA LIST.

    If you have no hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after the symptom is simulated once. Then repeat the simulation process again.

    HINT:

    In order to memorize the misfire DTC, it is necessary to drive with MISFIRE RPM, MISFIRE LOAD in the DATA LIST for the period of time in the chart below. Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. Turning the ignition switch OFF switches the diagnosis system from check mode to normal mode and all DTCs, freeze frame data and other data are erased.

    DRIVE PATTERN ENGINE SPEED AND TIME SPECIFICATIONS
    Engine Speed Time
    Idling 3 minutes 30 seconds or more
    1,000 rpm 3 minutes or more
    2,000 rpm 1 minute 30 seconds or more
    3,000 rpm 1 minute or more

  6. Check if there is misfire or not by monitoring, DTC and the freeze frame data. Record the DTCs, freeze frame data and misfire counter data.
  7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 5 seconds.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • If DTCs besides misfire DTCs are memorized simultaneously, troubleshoot the non-misfire DTCs first. Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  • If the misfire does not occur when the vehicle is brought to the workshop, the misfire can be confirmed by reproducing the condition of the freeze frame data. Also, after finishing the repair, confirm that there is no misfire (see CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN).
  • On 6 and 8 cylinder engines, cylinder specific misfire fault codes are disabled at high engine speeds. If the misfire starts in a high engine speed area or the misfire occurs only in a high engine speed area, only the general fault code P0300 will be stored.

    When only a general misfire fault code like P0300 is stored:

    1. Erase the general misfire fault code from the ECM using the hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool.
    2. Start the engine and drive the confirmation pattern.
    3. Read the value of the misfire ratio for each cylinder. Or read the DTC.
    4. Perform repairs on the cylinder that has a high misfire ratio. Or repair the cylinder indicated by the DTC.
    5. After finishing repairs, drive the confirmation pattern again and confirm that no misfire occurs.
  • When either of SHORT FT #1, LONG FT #1 in the freeze frame data is over the range of +/-20 %, there is a possibility that the air-fuel ratio is becoming too RICH (-20 % or less) or LEAN (+20 % or more).
  • When COOLANT TEMP in the freeze frame data is less than 80°C (176°F), there is a possibility of misfire only during engine warm-up.
  • If the misfire cannot be reproduced, the following reasons may apply: 1) the vehicle has low fuel, 2) improper fuel is being used, and 3) the ignition plug is contaminated.
  • Be sure to check the value on the misfire counter after the repair.
  1. CHECK OTHER PTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO MISFIRE DTCS)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester to the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      Only P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 are output A
      P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 and other DTCs are output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those codes first.

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS, CONNECTOR AND VACUUM HOSE IN ENGINE ROOM
    1. Check the connection conditions of the wire harness and connector.
    2. Check for the disconnection, piping and break of the vacuum hose.

      OK: Connected correctly and no damage on wire harness.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE, THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK CONNECTION OF PCV HOSE

    OK: PCV hose is connected correctly and PCV hose has no damage.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (NUMBER OF MISFIRE)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    3. Start the engine.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/CYL#1 to CYL#4.
    5. Read the number of misfires on the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

    HINT:

    When a misfire is not reproduced, be sure to select DTC RESULT branch below based on the stored DTC.

    Result:

    DTC RESULT
    High Misfire Rate Cylinder Proceed to
    1 or 2 cylinders A
    More than 3 cylinders B

    1. B: Go to step 15
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER
    1. Remove the ignition coil.
    2. Remove the spark plug.
    3. Check the spark plug type.

      Recommended spark plug:

      SPARK PLUG SPECIFICATIONS
      DENSO made SK20R11
      NGK made IFR6A11

    4. Measure the spark plug electrode gap.

      Standard: 1.0 to 1.1 mm (0.039 to 0.043 in.)

      Maximum: 1.3 mm (0.051 in.)

      NOTE: If adjusting the gap of a new spark plug, bend only the base of the ground electrode. Do not touch the tip. Never attempt to adjust the gap on a used plug.

    5. Check the electrode for carbon deposits.
    6. Perform a spark test.

    CAUTION: Always disconnect each injector connector.

    NOTE: Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds.

    1. Install the spark plug to the ignition coil and connect the ignition coil connector.
    2. Disconnect the injector connector.
    3. Ground the spark plug.
    4. Check if spark occurs while the engine is being cranked.

      5. Fig. 148: Checking For Spark
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    OK: Spark jumps across electrode gap.

    1. OK: Go to step 8
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHANGE NORMAL SPARK PLUG AND CHECK SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER
    1. Change to a normal spark plug.
    2. Perform a spark test.

    CAUTION: Always disconnect each injector connector.

    NOTE: Do not crank the engine for more than 2 seconds.

    1. Install the spark plug to the ignition coil and connect the ignition coil connector.
    2. Disconnect the injector connector.
    3. Ground the spark plug.
    4. Check if spark occurs while the engine is being cranked.

    OK: Spark jumps across electrode gap.

    1. OK: REPLACE SPARK PLUG
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK WIRE HARNESS OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (IGNITION COIL - ECM)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ignition coil and ECM.
      1. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
      2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Standard:

        Fig. 149: Testing Resistance At Wiring Harness Side Connectors
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      4. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.

        5. Fig. 150: Identifying Ignition Coil & ECM Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    2. Check the wire harness between the ignition coil and ECM.
      1. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
      2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 151: Testing Resistance At Wiring Harness Side Connectors
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Fig. 152: Identifying Ignition Coil & ECM Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

    1. OK: REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY (THEN CONFIRM THAT THERE IS NO MISFIRE)
    2. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
  8. INSPECT ECM TERMINAL OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (#1, #2, #3, #4 VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 153: Identifying ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 154: Testing Voltage At ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      HINT:

      Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope. Check the waveform of the ECM connectors.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      #1 to #4 - E01 Engine idling Connect waveform is as shown

      Fig. 155: Checking Waveform At ECM Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: Go to step 11
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR RESISTANCE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See INSPECTION )
    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See appropriate Fuel Systems article)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. CHECK WIRE HARNESS OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (INJECTOR - ECM, INJECTOR - IGNITION SWITCH)
    1. Check the wire harness between the injector and ECM.
      1. Disconnect the I8, I9, I10 and I11 injector connectors.
      2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 156: Identifying Injector & ECM Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 157: Resistance Test Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    2. Check the IG2 fuse.
      1. Remove the IG2 fuse from the instrument panel J/B.
      2. Measure the resistance of the IG2 fuse.

        Fig. 158: Locating IG2 Fuse
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard: Below 1 ohms.

    3. Check the wire harness between the injector and ignition switch.
      1. Disconnect the I8, I9, I10 and I11 injector connectors.
      2. Disconnect the I15 ignition switch connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        Fig. 159: Identifying Injectorr & Ignition Switch Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard:

        Fig. 160: Resistance Test Specifications
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR INJECTION AND VOLUME OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See INSPECTION )

    Standard:

    FUEL INJECTOR INJECTION VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS
    Injection Volume Difference Between Each Injector
    76 to 91 cm3 (4.6 to 5.5 cu in.) /15 seconds 15 cm3 (0.9 cu in.) or less

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  12. CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER

    See INSPECTION

    Standard:

    MISFIRING CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
    Item Specified Condition
    Compression pressure 1.360 MPa (13.9 kgf/cm2 , 198 psi)
    Minimum pressure 0.98 MPa (10 kgf/cm2 , 142 psi)
    Difference between each cylinder 0.1 MPa (1.0 kgf/cm2 , 14 psi)

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  13. CHECK VALVE CLEARANCE OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See ADJUSTMENT )

    Standard (cold):

    MISFIRING CYLINDER VALVE CLEARANCE CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
    Item Specified Condition
    Intake 0.19 to 0.29 mm (0.0075 to 0.0114 in.)
    Exhaust 0.30 to 0.40 mm (0.0118 to 0.0157 in.)

    1. NG: ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (See ADJUSTMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  14. SWITCH STEP BY NUMBER OF MISFIRE CYLINDER (REFER TO RESULTS OF STEP 4

    HINT:

    • If the result of step 4 is "1 or 2 cylinders", proceed to A.
    • If the result of step 4 is "more than 3 cylinders", proceed to B.
    1. B: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  15. CHECK VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. Check for loose or jumped tooth of the timing chain.

      OK: The matchmarks of the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are alined.

    1. NG: ADJUST VALVE TIMING (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  16. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )

    Standard:

    FUEL PRESSURE CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
    Item Specified Condition
    Fuel pressure 304 to 343 kPa (3.1 to 3.5 kgf/cm2 , 44 to 55 psi)

    1. NG: CHECK AND REPLACE FUEL PUMP, PRESSURE REGULATOR, FUEL PIPE LINE AND FILTER
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  17. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE AND MASS AIR FLOW RATE)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Check the intake air temperature.
      1. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/INTAKE AIR. Read the values.

        Temperature: Equivalent to ambient temperature

    4. Check the air flow rate.
      1. On the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/MAR Read the values.

        Standard:

        AIR FLOW RATE SPECIFICATIONS
        Condition Air Flow Rate (gm/s)
        Ignition switch ON (do not start engine) 0
        Idling 0.5 to 5
        Running without load (2,500 rpm) 3 to 10
        Idling to quickly accelerating Air flow rate fluctuates

    1. NG: REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  18. INSPECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (RESISTANCE)
    1. Remove the ECT sensor.
    2. Measure the resistance between the terminals.

      Fig. 161: Measuring Resistance Between Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 - 2 20°C (68°F) 2.32 to 2.59 kohms
      1 - 2 80°C (176°F) 0.310 to 0.326 kohms

      NOTE: If checking the ECT sensor in water, be careful not to allow water to contact the terminals. After the check, dry the sensor.

      HINT:

      Alternate procedure: Connect an ohmmeter to the installed ECT sensor and read the resistance. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the engine temperature in the immediate vicinity of the sensor. Compare these values to the resistance/temperature graph. Change the engine temperature (warm up or allow to cool down) and repeat the test.

    1. NG: REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  19. SWITCH STEP BY NUMBER OF MISFIRE CYLINDER (REFER TO RESULTS OF STEP 4)

    HINT:

    • If the result of step 4 is "1 or 2 cylinders", proceed to A.
    • If the result of step 4 is "more than 3 cylinders", proceed to B.
    1. B: AGAIN GO TO STEP 5
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
    3. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)

DTC P0325, P0327, P0328: KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0325: KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
  • DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
  • DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

A flat type knock sensor (non-resonant type) can detect vibrations in a wide band of frequency (about 6 kHz to 15 kHz) and has the following features:

  • Knock sensors is fitted on the cylinder block to detect the engine knocking.
  • The sensor contains a piezoelectric element which generates a voltage when it becomes deformed, which occurs when the cylinder block vibrates. If engine knocking occurs, the ignition timing is retarded to suppress it.

    • Fig. 162: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0325/0327/0328)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

If the ECM detects the DTC P0325, it enters the fail-safe mode in which the corrective retarded angle value is set to the maximum value.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The knock sensor, located on the cylinder block, detects spark knock. When a spark knock occurs, the sensor vibrates in a specific frequency range. When the ECM detects the voltage in this frequency range, it retards the ignition timing to suppress the spark knock.

The ECM also senses background engine noise with the knock sensor and uses this noise to check for faults in the sensor. If the knock sensor signal level is too low for more than 10 seconds, and if the knock sensor output voltage is out of normal range, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the knock sensor and sets a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 163: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

Knock Sensor Rationality P0325

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (KNOCK SENSOR RATIONALITY)
Battery voltage 10 V or more
Idle OFF
Time after engine start 5 sec. or more
ECT 60°C (140°F) or more
Spark cut OFF
Intake air amount 0.3 g/rev
RPM 3,000 to 5,500 rpm

Knock Sensor Range Check P0327,P0328

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (KNOCK SENSOR RANGER CHECK)
Battery voltage 10 V or more
Time after engine start 5 sec. or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

Knock Sensor Rationality P0325

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (KNOCK SENSOR RATIONALITY)
Knock sensor signal Signal level is low

Knock Sensor Range Check (Chattering) P0325

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (KNOCK SENSOR RANGE CHECK - CHATTERING)
Knock sensor voltage Less than 0.5 V or more than 4.5 V

Knock Sensor Range Check (Low voltage) P0327

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (KNOCK SENSOR RANGE CHECK - LOW VOLTAGE)
Knock sensor voltage Less than 0.5 V

Knock Sensor Range Check (High voltage) P0328

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (KNOCK SENSOR RANGE CHECK - HIGH VOLTAGE)
Knock sensor voltage More than 4.5 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 164: Knock Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. READ OUTPUT PTC
    1. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Warm up the engine.
    3. Run the engine at 3,000 rpm for 10 seconds or more.
    4. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    5. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    6. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DTC INFO/CURRENT CODES.
    7. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC output) Proceed to
      Only P0325 is output again A
      P0325, P0327 and/or P0328 are output again B
      P0325, P0327 and/or P0328 are not output again C

    1. B: Go to step 3
    2. C: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR
    1. Check the knock sensor installation.

      Fig. 165: Locating Knock Sensor
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Torque is 20 N.m (204 kgf.cm, 15 ft.lbf)

    1. NG: TIGHTEN SENSOR
    2. OK: REPLACE KNOCK SENSOR
  3. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - KNOCK SENSOR)
    1. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connector.

      Fig. 166: Identifying E8 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      E8-1 (KNK1) - E8-28 (FKNK1) 20°C (68°F) 120 to 280kohms

    1. NG: Go to step 5
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT ECM (KNK1 VOLTAGE)
    1. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM terminals.

      4. Fig. 167: Identifying E8 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Voltage:

    TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
    Tester Connection Specified Condition
    E8-1 (KNK1) - E8-28 (FKNK1) 4.5 to 5.5 V

    HINT:

    Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope. After warming up, run the engine at 4,000 rpm. Check the waveform between terminal KNK1 and FKNK1 of the ECM connector.

    Fig. 168: Identifying KNK1 Signal Waveform
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Standard:

    TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
    Tester Connection Specified Condition
    E8-1 (KNK1) - E8-28 (FKNK1) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS

    NOTE: Fault may be intermittent. Check the harness and connectors carefully.

  5. INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR
    1. Remove the knock sensor.
    2. Measure the resistance between the terminals.

      Fig. 169: Measuring Resistance Between Knock Sensor Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Resistance is 120 to 280 kohms at 20°C (68°F)

    1. NG: REPLACE KNOCK SENSOR
    2. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

DTC P0335, P0339: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0335: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0339: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The crankshaft position sensor (CKP) system consists of a crankshaft position sensor plate and a pickup coil.

The sensor plate has 34 teeth and is installed on the crankshaft. The pickup coil is made of an iron core and magnet. The sensor plate rotates and as each tooth passes through the pickup coil, a pulse signal is created.

The pickup coil generates 34 signals for each engine revolution. Based on these signals, the ECM calculates the crankshaft position and engine RPM. Using these calculations, the fuel injection time and ignition timing are controlled.

Fig. 170: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0335/0339)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

If there is no signal from the crankshaft sensor even though the engine is revolving, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 171: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

CKP Sensor Range Check during Cranking P0335

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (CKP SENSOR RANGE CHECK DURING CRANKING)
Starter ON
Minimum battery voltage while starter ON 11 V

CKP Sensor Range Check during Engine Running P0335

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (CKP SENSOR RANGE CHECK DURING ENGINE RUNNING)
Engine RPM 600 rpm or more
Starter OFF
Time after starter ON to OFF 3 sec. or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P0335, P0339

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0335, P0339)
CKP signal No signal

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
CKP signal CKP sensor voltage fluctuates when the crankshaft rotates 34 CKP signals per 1 revolution crankshaft

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 172: Camshaft/Crankshaft Position Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

  • Read values on the hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool.
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Start the engine and push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    3. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/ENGINE SPD.
  • The engine speed can be confirmed in DATA LIST using the hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool. If there are no NE signals from the crankshaft position sensor despite the engine revolving, the engine speed will be indicated as zero. If voltage output of the crankshaft position sensor is insufficient, the engine speed will be indicated as lower than the actual rpm.
  • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBDII scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the C7 sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the sensor.

      Fig. 173: Identifying Crankshaft Position Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 - 2 Cold 985 to 1,600 ohms
      1 - 2 Hot 1,265 to 1,890 ohms

      NOTE: In the above section, the terms "cold" and "hot" refer to the temperature of the coils. "Cold" means approximately -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F). "Hot" means approximately 50°C to 100°C (122°F to 212°F).

      HINT:

      Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between the terminals of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 174: Identifying ECM Connector Signal Waveform Test Terminalss
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-27 (G2+) - E9-24 (NE-) E9-25 (NE+) - E9-24 (NE-) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the C7 sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 175: Identifying Crankshaft Position Sensor And ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 176: Resistance Test Results
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR)
    1. Check the crankshaft position sensor installation.

    OK: Sensor is installed correctly.

    1. NG: TIGHTEN SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE NO.1 (TEETH OF SIGNAL PLATE)
    1. Remove the crankshaft position sensor plate No. 1 (See OVERHAUL ).
    2. Check the teeth of the signal plate.

    OK: The pulley does not have any cracks or deformation.

    1. NG: REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE NO.1
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0340, P0341: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0340: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
  • DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, like the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor, consists of a magnet and an iron core wrapped in copper wire. The camshaft has 3 teeth and the CMP sensor is installed so that it can detect these teeth passing by. When the camshaft rotates and the teeth pass by the CMP sensor, the magnet on the CMP sensor creates a magnetic field and voltage is generated in the copper wire. When the crankshaft makes two rotation, voltage will be generated in the CMP sensor 3 times. The CKP sensor is roughly the same. When the crankshaft makes one rotation, its 34 teeth pass by the CKP sensor and voltage is generated 34 times. The camshaft rotates at half the speed of the crankshaft. Therefore, the CMP sensor generates voltage 3 times in the time the crankshaft takes to make 2 rotations.

The ECM detects generation of these voltages to locate the camshaft position, which are used to indicate the cylinder.

Fig. 177: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0340/0341/)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

  • DTC P0340 indicates a malfunction related to the camshaft position sensor (+) circuit (Wire harness (ECM - camshaft position sensor) and camshaft position sensor).
  • DTC P0341 indicates a malfunction related to the camshaft position sensor (-) circuit (Wire harness (ECM - camshaft position sensor) and camshaft position sensor).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

If there is no signal from the camshaft position sensor even though the engine is revolving, or if the rotation of the camshaft and the crankshaft is not synchronized, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction of the sensor.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 178: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

CMP Sensor Range Check P0340

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (CMP SENSOR RANGE CHECK)
Starter ON
Minimal battery voltage while starter ON 11 V

CMP/CKP Misalignment and CMP Sensor Malfunction P0340

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (CMP/CKP MISALIGNMENT AND CMP SENSOR MALFUNCTION)
Engine RPM 600 rpm or more
Starter OFF

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

CMP Sensor Range Check P0340

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (CMP SENSOR RANGE CHECK)
CMP signal No signal

CMP/CKP Misalignment P0340

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (CMP/CKP MISALIGNMENT)
CMP and CKP phase Misaligned

CMP Sensor Malfunction P0341

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (CMP SENSOR MALFUNCTION)
CMP and CKP phase Misaligned
CMP signal per 2 revolutions crankshaft 12 CMP signals or more

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
CMP sensor signal CMP sensor voltage fluctuates when the camshaft rotates 3 CMP signals per 2 revolutions crankshaft

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0335, P0339: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR "A" CIRCUIT.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the C1 sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the sensor.

      Fig. 179: Identifying Camshaft Position Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 - 2 Cold 835 to 1,400 ohms.
      1 - 2 Hot 1,060 to 1,645 ohms.

      NOTE: In the above section, the terms "cold" and "hot" refer to the temperature of the coils. "Cold" means approximately -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F). "Hot" means approximately 50°C to 100°C (122°F to 212°F).

      HINT:

      Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform between the terminals of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 180: Identifying ECM Signal Waveform Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-27 (G2+) - E9-24 (NE-) E9-25 (NE+) - E9-24 (NE-) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the C1 sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 181: Identifying Camshaft Position Sensor And ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      C1-1 - E9-27 (G2+) C1-2 - E9-24 (NE-) Below 1 ohms
      C1-1 C1-2 or E9-27 (G2+) - Body ground or E9-24 (NE-) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION (CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR)
    1. Check the sensor installation.

      OK: Sensor is installed correctly.

    1. NG: TIGHTEN SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT CAMSHAFT
    1. Remove the camshafts (See REPLACEMENT ).
    2. Check the camshaft lobes.

      OK: The camshaft lobes do not have any cracks or deformation.

    1. NG: REPLACE CAMSHAFT
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354: IGNITION COIL PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

  • DTC P0351: IGNITION COIL "A" PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL "B" PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL "C" PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
  • DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL "D" PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

HINT:

  • These DTCs indicate a malfunction related to primary circuit.
  • If DTC P0351 is displayed, check No. 1 ignition coil with igniter circuit.
  • If DTC P0352 is displayed, check No. 2 ignition coil with igniter circuit.
  • If DTC P0353 is displayed, check No. 3 ignition coil with igniter circuit.
  • If DTC P0354 is displayed, check No. 4 ignition coil with igniter circuit.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

A Direct Ignition System (DIS) is used on this vehicle.

The DIS is a 1-cylinder ignition system which ignites one cylinder with one ignition coil. In the 1-cylinder ignition system, one spark plug is connected to the end of the secondary winding. High-voltage is generated in the secondary winding and is applied directly to the spark plug. The spark of the spark plug passes from the center electrode to the ground electrode.

The ECM determines the ignition timing and outputs the ignition signals (IGTs) for each cylinder. Using the IGT, the ECM turns on and off the power transistor inside the igniter, which switches on and off current to the primary coil. When current to the primary coil is cut off, high-voltage is generated in the secondary coil and this voltage is applied to the spark plugs to create sparks inside the cylinders. As the ECM cuts the current to the primary coil, the igniter sends back the ignition confirmation signal (IGF) for each cylinder ignition to the ECM.

Fig. 182: Ignition Coil Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 183: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0351/0352/0353/0354)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Fig. 184: Ignition Signal At Normal And Malfunction Condition
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

If the ECM does not receive the IGF after sending the IGT, it interprets this as a fault in the igniter and sets a DTC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 185: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Either of the following condition is met  
Engine RPM 1,500 rpm or less
Starter OFF

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0113)
IGF signal ECM does not receive any IGF signal when ECM sends IGT signal to igniter

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
IGF signal Igniter outputs IGF signal when it receives IGT signal from ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 186: Ignition Coil And ECM Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK SPARK PLUG AND SPARK OF MISFIRING CYLINDER (See INSPECTION )

    OK: Spark occurs.

    1. NG: Go to step 6
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (IGNITION COIL ASSY - ECM (IGF TERMINAL))
    1. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
    2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.

      Fig. 187: Identifying Ignition Coil & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 188: Ignition Coil Harness Resistance Test Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OF REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK ECM (IGF1 VOLTAGE)
    1. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 189: Identifying E7 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E7-24 (IGF1) - E9-1 (E1) 4.5 to 5.5 V

      HINT:

      Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 190: Identifying IGT And IGF Signal Waveform ECM Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E7-24 (IGF1) - E9-1 (E1) Correct waveform is as shown

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (IGNITION COIL ASSY - ECM (IGT TERMINAL))
    1. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
    2. Disconnect the E7 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 191: Identifying Igniton Coil & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 192: Ignition Coil Harness Resistance Test Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK ECM
    1. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors when the engine is cranked.

      Fig. 193: Identifying E7 And E9 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 194: Measuring Voltage At ECM Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    2. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors when the engine is cranked.

      Fig. 195: Identifying E7 And E9 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 196: Measuring Voltage At ECM Terminals (Ignition Coil Connectors Disconected)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      HINT:

      Reference: Inspection using an oscilloscope. During cranking or idling, check the waveform of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 197: Identifying IGT And IGF Signal Waveform ECM Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 198: Wavefor Desired Result
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK IGNITION COIL ASSY (POWER SOURCE)
    1. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the wire harness side connector and body ground.

      Fig. 199: Identifying Ignition Coil Connector Terminals (Wire Harness Side)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 200: Testing For Voltage At Coil Connectors (Ignition ON)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (IGNITION COIL ASSY - IGNITION SWITCH)
    1. Check the IG2 fuse.
      1. Remove the IG2 fuse from the instrument panel J/B Assy.
      2. Measure the resistance of the IG2 fuse.

        Fig. 201: Locating IG2 Fuse
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

        Standard: Below 1 ohms

    2. Disconnect the I2, I3, I4 and I5 ignition coil connectors.
    3. Disconnect the I15 ignition switch connector.
    4. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 202: Identifying Ignition Coil And Ignition Switch Connector Terminals (Wire Harness Side)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 203: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE IGNITION COIL ASSY

DTC P0420: CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1)

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM uses sensors mounted before and after the three-way catalyst (TWC) to monitor its' efficiency. The first sensor, an Air Fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, sends pre-catalyst A/F ratio information to the ECM. The second sensor, a heated oxygen sensor (O2S), sends post-catalyst information to the ECM. The ECM compares these two signals to judge the efficiency of the catalyst and the catalyst's ability to store oxygen. During normal operation, the TWC stores and releases oxygen as needed. The capacity to store oxygen results in a low variation in the post-TWC exhaust stream as shown below.

If the catalyst is functioning normally, the waveform of the heated oxygen sensor slowly switches between RICH and LEAN. If the catalyst is deteriorated, the waveform will alternate frequently between RICH and LEAN. As the catalyst efficiency degrades, its ability to store oxygen is reduced and the catalyst output becomes more variable. When running the monitor, the ECM compares sensor 1 signals (A/F sensor) over a specific amount of time to determine catalyst efficiency. The ECM begins by calculating the signal length for both sensors (for the rear oxygen sensor, the ECM uses the output voltage signal length). If the oxygen sensor output voltage signal length is greater than the threshold (threshold is calculated based on the A/F sensor signal length), the ECM concludes that the catalyst is malfunctioning. The ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC will be set.

Fig. 204: Identifying A/F Sensor And Heated Oxygen Sensor Waveform Normal And Deteriorated Catalyst Patterns
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 205: Identifying Heated Oxygen Sensor Signal Wave Form
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 206: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0420)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

  • Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.
  • Sensor 2 refers to the sensor farthest away from the engine assembly.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0420: Catalyst deterioration
Required sensors/ components (Main) Catalyst
Required sensors / components (Related) A/F sensor, Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), IAT sensor, MAF meter, CKP sensor, ECT sensor
Frequency of operation Once per driving cycle
Duration 120 sec. (30 sec. x 4)
MIL operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Accumulated time that the following conditions are met 30 sec.
Battery voltage 11 V or more
IAT -10°C (14°F) or more
Idle OFF
MAF 8 to 35 g/ sec.
RPM Less than 4,500 rpm
ECT 75°C (167°F) or more
Estimated catalyst temperature 550 to 910°C (1,022 to 1,652°F)
Fuel system status Closed Loop
A/F sensor voltage 3 to 3.5 V

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0113)
Number that the following conditions is set: 4 times
Catalyst deterioration level (Rear HO2S locus length) 34 V or more for 30 seconds (Varies with A/F sensor locus length)

MONITOR STATUS

The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in this component can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. This procedure is described in CHECKING MONITOR STATUS.

  • TID (Test Identification Data) is assigned to each emission-related component. TLT (Test Limit Type):
  • If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit. If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.
  • CID (Component Identification Data) is assigned to each test value.
  • Unit Conversion is used to calculate the test value indicated on generic OBD scan tools.

TID $01: Catalyst - Using A/F Sensor and HO2S

Fig. 207: Test Identification Data Chart (A/F Sensor And HO2S)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CONDITIONING A/F SENSOR AND HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR FOR TESTING

Fig. 208: A/F Sensor And Heated Oxygen Sensor Testing Criteria
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
  2. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessories switched OFF until the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is stable.
  3. Run the engine at 2,500 to 3,000 rpm for about 3 minutes.
  4. When alternating the engine between 3,000 rpm for 2 seconds and 2,000 rpm for 2 seconds, check the waveform of the oxygen sensor (bank 1 sensor 2).

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO DTC P0420)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      Only P0420 is output A
      P0420 and other DTCs are output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides P0420 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those codes first.

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE
    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE POINT
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) (See INSPECTION )
    1. NG: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (See DTC P0136, P0137, P0138: OXYGEN SENSOR CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 2))

    OK: During air-fuel ratio feedback, the O2S's output alternates between rich and lean.

    1. NG: REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
    2. OK: REPLACE BOTH FRONT CATALYST AND REAR CATALYST

It is possible the malfunctioning area can be found using the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation. The A/F CONTROL operation can determine if the A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning or not.

  1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
  2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
  3. Warm up the engine by running the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
  4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL.
  5. Perform the A/F CONTROL operation with the engine idle (press the right or left button).

    Result:

    Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume

    +25 % --> rich output: More than 0.5 V

    -12.5 % --> lean output: Less than 0.4 V

NOTE: The A/F sensor output has a few seconds of delay and the heated oxygen sensor output has about 20 seconds of delay at maximum.

Fig. 209: Injector Active Test Result Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

The following of A/F CONTROL procedure enables a technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the heated oxygen sensors.

For displaying the graph, enter "ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA", select "AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2" by pressing "YES" and push "ENTER". Then press "F4".

DTC P043E, P043F: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM REFERENCE ORIFICE

  • DTC P043E: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM REFERENCE ORIFICE CLOG UP
  • DTC P043F: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM REFERENCE ORIFICE HIGH FLOW

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 210: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P043E/043F)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

ECM MONITOR DESCRIPTIONS
Order Operation Description Time
- ECM start Power is supplied to ECM when 5 hours have passed after ignition switch is turned OFF. -
A Atmospheric pressure measurement ECM turns vent valve OFF (vent) and measures EVAP system pressure to memorize atmospheric pressure. If EVAP pressure is not 525 to 825 mmHg (70 to 110 kPa), ECM cancels EVAP monitor. 10 seconds
B EVAP volume measurement ECM turns vent valve ON (dosed) to close EVAP system. ECM measures EVAP pressure to check EVAP volume. If pressure is not stable, ECM interprets that EVAP volume is too large to continue EVAP monitor and cancels EVAP monitor. 60 seconds
C 0.02 inch leak pressure measurement Vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through 0.02 inch orifice and pressure is measured. ECM determines this as 0 02 inch leak pressure. 60 seconds
D EVAP leak check Vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system and EVAP system pressure is measured. If stabilized pressure is larger than 0.02 inch leak pressure, ECM determines EVAP system has leak. If EVAP pressure does not stabilize within 12 minutes, ECM cancels EVAP monitor. Within 12 minutes (1)
E Check valve monitor ECM stops vacuum pump and measures EVAP pressure increase. If there is no increase, ECM interprets this as normal. 10 seconds
F Purge VSV monitor ECM opens purge VSV and measures EVAP pressure increase. If increase is large, ECM interprets this as normal. 10 seconds
G Final check ECM measures atmospheric pressure and records monitor result. -
(1) When small amount of fuel is in the fuel tank, it takes a long time for the EVAP pressure to be stabilized.

Fig. 211: EVAP Leak And Pressure Measurement Checking System Diagram (A-D)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. P043E: 0.02 inch orifice clog

    For order C, the vent valve is turned OFF (vent) and the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through 0.02 inch orifice. Then the pressure is measured. If pressure is lower than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa) the ECM determines that 0.02 inch orifice has a clog malfunction. The ECM stops the EVAP system monitor, illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    2. Fig. 212: EVAP Pressure (0.02 Inch Orifice Clog)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  2. P043F: 0.02 inch orifice high-flow

    For order C, the vent valve is turned OFF (vent) and the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through 0.02 inch orifice. Then the pressure is measured. If pressure is higher than -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa), the ECM determines that 0.02 inch orifice has a high-flow malfunction. The ECM stops the EVAP system monitor, illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    3. Fig. 213: EVAP Pressure Measuring (0.02 Inch Orifice High-Flow)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 15 minutes (varies with amount of fuel in tank)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

"Saturated" indicates EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds.

  1. P043E: 0.02 inch orifice clog

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (0.02 INCH ORIFICE CLOG)
    Either of the following conditions is set  
    0.02 inch leak pressure Less than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa)
    0.02 inch leak pressure Not saturated

  2. P043F: 0.02 inch orifice high-flow

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (0.02 INCH ORIFICE HIGH-FLOW)
    Either of the following conditions is set  
    0.02 inch leak pressure -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or more
    0.02 inch leak pressure Not saturated

MONITOR STATUS

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

DTC P0441: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM INCORRECT PURGE FLOW

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 214: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0441)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Two monitors are run to confirm proper EVAP system operation. The "Key-off" monitor runs when the ignition switch is turned OFF and 5 hours have passed. The "purge flow" monitor runs when the engine is running.

  1. KEY-OFF MONITOR

    When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

    Fig. 215: ECM Monitor Descriptions Chart
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Fig. 216: EVAP Leak And Pressure Measurement Checking System Diagram (A-D)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Purge VSV stuck open

      For order D, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP system. Then the pressure is measured. If the stabilized pressure is higher than "(0.02 inch leak pressure) x 0.2", the ECM determines that the purge VSV is stuck open.

      Fig. 217: EVAP Pressure (Purge VSV Stuck Open)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    2. Purge VSV stuck closed

      For order F, after the vacuum pump turns OFF, the pressure sensor measures the EVAP system pressure when the purge VSV has been turned ON (open). If the pressure increases 2.25 mmHg (0.3 kPa) at this time, the ECM determines that the purge VSV is operating normally. If the pressure does not increase, the ECM determines that the purge VSV is stuck closed.

      Fig. 218: EVAP Pressure (Purge VSV Stuck Closed)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  2. PURGE FLOW MONITOR

    The purge flow monitor runs a monitor (a), and then runs another monitor (b) if necessary.

    1. 1st monitor

      When the engine is running and the purge VSV is turned ON (open), the ECM monitors the purge flow by measuring the EVAP pressure change. If negative pressure is not created, the ECM starts the next monitor.

    2. 2nd monitor

      The vent valve is turned ON (closed) and the EVAP system pressure is measured. If pressure change is less than 7.5 mmHg (1 kPa), the purge VSV may be stuck closed. The ECM illuminates the MIL and sets DTC 0441 (2-trip detection logic).

      Fig. 219: EVAP Pressure During Purge Flow Monitor
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION (KEY-OFF MONITOR)

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Purge VSV and pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 15 minutes (varies with amount of fuel in tank)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

"Saturated" indicates EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds,

  1. Purge VSV stuck open

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (PURGE VSV STUCK OPEN)
    All of the following conditions are set  
    Vacuum introduction time Less than 12 min.
    EVAP pressure when leak check More than 0.02 inch leak pressure x 0.2
    EVAP pressure when leak check Saturated

  2. Purge VSV stuck closed

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (PURGE VSV STUCK CLOSED)
    EVAP pressure change for 10 seconds when purge VSV is opened after leak check Less than 2.25 mmHg (0.3 kPa)

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION (PURGE FLOW MONITOR)

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Purge VSV and pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration 20 to 25 seconds
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Engine Running
ECT 4.4°C (40°F)or more
IAT 4.4°C (40°F) or more
Scantool No active test for purge VSV
Battery voltage 10 V or more
Duty ratio of Purge VSV 8 % or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

* If the 1st monitor conditions are met, the ECM starts the 2nd monitor.

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P0113)
The following conditions are set  
1st monitor (all of the following conditions are met)  
Pressure change when purge flow control is started 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) or less
Purge volume 0.5 g/sec or more
2nd monitor*(all of the following conditions are met)  
Pressure when vent valve is turned ON (closed) during purge flow control 7.5 mmHg (1 kPa) or less
Purge volume 0.5 g/sec or more

MONITOR STATUS

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

DTC P0451: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR

  • DTC P0451: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR RANGE/PERFORMANCE
  • DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR/SWITCH LOW INPUT
  • DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR/SWITCH HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 220: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0451/0452/0453)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 221: Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

NOTE:
  • When a vehicle is brought into the workshop, leave it as is. Do not change the vehicle condition.
  • For example, do not tighten the fuel cap. Do not disassemble the pump module.

  1. CONFIRM DTC AND EVAP PRESSURE
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON without the engine start.
    3. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DTC INFO/CURRENT CODES.
    4. Confirm DTC.
    5. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/VAPOR PRESS.
    6. Read the EVAP pressure (VAPOR PRESS).

      7. Fig. 222: DTC And EVAP Pressure Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 4.
    2. C: Go to EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE (See EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE)
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PUMP MODULE - ECM)
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance between the terminal E5-21 and the body ground.

      Fig. 223: Identifying E5 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 224: Pump Module - ECM Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 7.
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PUMP MODULE - ECM)
    1. Remove the exhaust tail pipe.
    2. Remove the heat insulator under the canister.
    3. Disconnect the canister connector.

      4. Fig. 225: Identifying Canister Harness Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    4. Measure the resistance between the terminal E5-21 and the body ground.

      5. Fig. 226: Identifying ECM 21 Connector Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 227: Pump Module - ECM Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. A: Go to step 5.
    2. B: Go to step 6.
  4. CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PUMP MODULE - ECM)
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Remove the exhaust tail pipe.
    3. Remove the heat insulator under the canister.
    4. Disconnect the canister connector.
    5. Measure the voltage and resistance of the C17 connector.

      Fig. 228: Locating Canister Harness Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TERMINALS VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
      Terminal No. Specified Condition
      C17-4 - Body ground 4.5 to 5.5 V
      C17-3 - Body ground 4.5 to 5.5 V
      C17-2 - Body ground 100 ohms or less

      6. Fig. 229: Identifying Canister Harness Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 230: Pump Module ECM Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. A: Go to step 5
    2. B: Go to step 6.
  5. REPLACE PUMP MODULE
    1. Remove the exhaust tail pipe.
    2. Remove the heat insulator under the canister.
    3. Disconnect the hoses and the connector.
    4. Remove the 3 bolts and the pump module with the O-ring.
    5. Install a new pump module with a new O-ring.
    6. Install the 3 bolts.
    7. Connect the hoses and the connector.
    8. Go to the next step before installing the exhaust tail pipe.

      9. Fig. 231: Identifying Pump Module
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 8.
  6. REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

    In case that the exhaust tail pipe is removed, go to the next step before installing it.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 8.
  7. REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. NEXT: Go to step 8
  8. CONFIRM PTC (AFTER REPAIR)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Clear the DTC with the hand-held tester.
    3. Wait for 60 seconds with the ignition switch ON.
    4. Confirm the current DTC. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBDII/DTC INFO/CURRENT DTC.
    5. If no DTC is displayed, the repair has been completed properly.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

  1. P0451: Pressure sensor noise

    If the pressure sensor output fluctuates many times over 10 seconds, the ECM stops the EVAP system monitor, illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (2-trip detection logic).

  2. P0451: Pressure sensor stuck

    If the pressure does not vary for 10 seconds, the ECM stops the EVAP system monitor, illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (2-trip detection logic).

  3. P0452: Pressure sensor low output

    If the pressure sensor output is below 0.45 V, the ECM stops the EVAP system monitor, illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (1-trip detection logic). In this case, the pressure sensor or its circuit is open or shorted.

  4. P0453: Pressure sensor high output

    If the pressure sensor output is 4.9 V or more, the ECM stops the EVAP system monitor, illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (1 -trip detection logic). In this case, the pressure sensor or its circuit is open or shorted.

    5. Fig. 232: Pressure Sensor Specification Graph
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 233: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present None
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

  1. P0451: Pressure sensor noise

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (PRESSURE SENSOR NOISE)
    Change of pressure sensor output for 10 seconds More than +/-2.25 mmHg (+/-0.3 kPa) 10 times

  2. P0451: Pressure sensor stuck

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (PRESSURE SENSOR STUCK)
    Change of 0.02 inch leak pressure for 10 seconds Less than 6 mmHg (0.8 kPa)

  3. P0452: Pressure sensor low voltage

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (PRESSURE SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)
    Pressure sensor voltage Less than 0.45 V

  4. P0453: Pressure sensor high voltage

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH VOLTAGE)
    Pressure sensor voltage More than 4.9 V

DTC P0455, P0456: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED

  • DTC P0455: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (GROSS LEAK)
  • DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 234: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0455/0456)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION
Order Operation Description Time
- ECM start Power is supplied to ECM when 5 hours have passed after ignition switch is turned OFF. -
A Atmospheric pressure measurement ECM turns vent valve OFF (vent) and measures EVAP system pressure to memorize atmospheric pressure. If EVAP pressure is not 525 to 825 mmHg (70 to 110 kPa), ECM cancels EVAP monitor. 10 seconds
B EVAP volume measurement ECM turns vent valve ON (closed) to close EVAP system. ECM measures EVAP pressure to check EVAP volume. If pressure is not stable, ECM interprets that EVAP volume is too large to continue EVAP monitor and cancels EVAP monitor. 60 seconds
C 0.02 inch leak pressure measurement Vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through 0.02 inch orifice and pressure is measured. ECM determines this as 0.02 inch leak pressure. 60 seconds
D EVAP leak check Vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system and EVAP system pressure is measured. If stabilized pressure is larger than 0.02 inch leak pressure, ECM determines EVAP system has leak. If EVAP pressure does not stabilize within 12 minutes, ECM cancels EVAP monitor. Within 12 minutes(1)
E Check valve monitor ECM stops vacuum pump and measures EVAP pressure increase. If there is no increase, ECM interprets this as normal. 10 seconds
F Purge VSV monitor ECM opens purge VSV and measures EVAP pressure increase. If increase is large, ECM interprets this as normal. 10 seconds
G Final check ECM measures atmospheric pressure and records monitor result. -
(1) When small amount of fuel is in the fuel tank, it takes a long time for the EVAP pressure to be stabilized.

Fig. 235: EVAP Leak And Pressure Measurement Checking System Diagram (A-D)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. P0455: EVAP gross leak

    For order D, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system and EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized pressure is larger than "(0.02 inch leak pressure) x 0.2" (near atmospheric pressure), the ECM determines that the EVAP system has a large leakage, illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

  2. P0456: EVAP small leak

    For order D, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system and EVAP system pressure is measured. If the stabilized pressure is larger than 0.02 inch leak pressure, the ECM determines that the EVAP system has a small leakage, illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    3. Fig. 236: EVAP Pressure Leak Detection Graph
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Purge VSV and pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 15 minutes (varies with amount of fuel in tank)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

"Saturated" indicates EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds.

  1. P0455: EVAP gross leak

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (EVAP GROSS LEAK)
    All of the following conditions are set  
    EVAP pressure when leak check More than 0.02 inch leak pressure x 0.2
    EVAP pressure when leak check Saturated
    Vacuum introduction time Within 12 minutes

  2. P0456: EVAP small leak

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (EVAP SMALL LEAK)
    All of the following conditions are set  
    Vacuum introduction time Less than 12 min.
    FTP when vacuum pump is ON Less than 0.02 inch leak pressure x 0.2
    EVAP pressure when leak check More than 0.02 inch leak pressure
    EVAP pressure when leak check Saturated

MONITOR STATUS

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

DTC P0500, P0503: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR "A"

  • DTC P0500: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR "A"
  • DTC P0503: VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR "A" INTERMITTENT/ERRATIC/HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The speed sensor detects the wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU. The skid control ECU converts these wheel speed signals into a 4-pulse signal and outputs it to the ECM via the combination meter. The ECM determines the vehicle speed based on the frequency of these pulse signals.

Fig. 237: Vehicle Speed Sensor ECM Communication Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 238: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0500/0503)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM assumes that the vehicle is being driven when the transmission counter gear indicates more than 300 rpm and over 30 seconds have passed since the park/neutral position switch was turned OFF. If there is no signal from the vehicle speed sensor with these conditions satisfied, the ECM concludes that the vehicle speed sensor is malfunctioning. The ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC is set.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0500: VSS Circuit
Required sensors/ components (Main) Vehicle speed sensor (VSS), Combination meter, ABS ECU
Required sensors / components (Related) Transmission counter gear Speed (CS) sensor, PNP switch, ECT sensor
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 2 seconds
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Transmission counter gear speed 300 rpm or more
Engine condition Running
Time after ignition switch ON 3 sec. or more
Either of the following conditions A and B is met:  
Conditions A:  
Time after PNP switch ON to OFF 2 sec. or more
ECT and ECT sensor ECT is 20° C (68° F) or more and ECT sensor dose not malfunctions (P0115 or P0116)
Conditions B:  
Time after PNP switch ON to OFF 30 sec. or more
ECT and ECT sensor ECT is less than 20°C (68° F) or ECT sensor fail detected (P0115 or P0116)

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
VSS signal No pulse input

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 239: Combination Meter Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OPERATION OF SPEEDOMETER
    1. Drive the vehicle and check if operation of the speedometer in the combination meter is normal.

      HINT:

      The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal.

    1. NG: CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT (See LOCATION )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT ECM (SPD VOLTAGE)
    1. Shift the lever to the neutral position.
    2. Jack up the vehicle.
    3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    4. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E6-17 (SPD) - E9-1 (E1) Generated intermittently

      HINT:

      The output voltage should fluctuate up and down similarly to the illustration when the wheel is turned slowly.

    Fig. 240: Measuring ECM Wheel Speed Sensor (SPD Voltage)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0504: BRAKE SWITCH "A"/"B" CORRELATION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

In addition to turning on the stop lamp, the stop lamp switch signals are used for a variety of engine, transmission, and suspension functions as well as being an input for diagnostic checks. It is important that the switch operates properly, therefore this switch is designed with two complementary signal outputs: STP and ST1. The ECM analyzes these signal outputs to detect malfunctions in the stop lamp switch.

HINT:

Normal condition is as shown in the table.

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION AND SWITCH NORMAL CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
Signal Brake pedal released In transition Brake pedal depressed
STP OFF ON ON
ST1 ON ON OFF

Fig. 241: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0504)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 242: Brake Switch A/B Correlation Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester:

  1. CHECK STOP LAMP (OPERATION)
    1. Check if the stop lamps turn on and off normally when the brake pedal is depressed and released.

      OK:

      The stop lamps turn on when you depress the brake pedal.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (RESISTANCE)
    1. Measure the resistance of the switch terminals.

      Fig. 243: Identifying Stop Lamp Switch Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      STOP LAMP SWITCH CONDITION AND RESISTANCE/VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
      Switch Condition Tester Connection Specified Condition
      Switch pin free 1 - 2 Below 1.5 V
      Switch pin free 3 - 4 10 kohms or higher
      Switch pin pushed in 1 - 2 10 kohms or higher
      Switch pin pushed in 3 - 4 Below 1.5 V

    1. NG: REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (STP SIGNAL, ST1 VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/STOP LIGHT SW. Read the value.

      Standard:

      BRAKE PEDAL CONDITION AND SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS
      Brake Pedal Condition Specified Condition
      Depressed STP Signal ON
      Released STP Signal OFF

    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 244: Identifying ECM E9 and E6 Connector Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Brake Pedal Condition Specified Condition
      E6-12 (ST1) - E9-1 (E1) Depressed Below 1.5 V
      E6-12 (ST1) - E9-1 (E1) Released 7.5 to 14 V

    1. OK: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (STOP LAMP SWITCH - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the S15 stop lamp switch connector.
    2. Disconnect the E6 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 245: Identifying Wire Harness Side (Stop Lamp Switch) & ECM Connector Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 246: Wire Harness Resistance Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. CHECK STOP LAMP (OPERATION)
    1. Check if the stop lamps turn on and off normally when the brake pedal is depressed and released.

      OK:

      The stop lamps turn on when you depress the brake pedal.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY
    1. Measure the resistance of the switch terminals.

      Fig. 247: Identifying Stop Lamp Switch Assembly Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Switch Condition Tester Connection Specified Condition
      Switch pin free 1 - 2 Below 1 ohms
      Switch pin free 3 - 4 10 kohms or higher
      Switch pin pushed in 1 - 2 10 kohms or higher
      Switch pin pushed in 3 - 4 Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM (STP, ST1 VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 248: Identifying E9 & E6 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Brake Pedal Condition Specified Condition
      E6-19 (STP) - E9-1 (E1) Depressed 7.5 to 14 V
      E6-19 (STP) - E9-1 (E1) Released Below 1.5 V
      E6-12 (ST1) - E9-1 (E1) Depressed Below 1.5 V
      E6-12 (ST1) - E9-1 (E1) Released 7.5 to 14 V

    1. OK: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (STOP LAMP SWITCH - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the S15 stop lamp switch connector.
    2. Disconnect the E6 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 249: Identifying Wire Harness (Stop Lamp Switch) & ECM Connector Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 250: Harness Resistance Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0505: IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The idle speed is controlled by the Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS).

The ETCS is composed of the throttle motor, which operates the throttle valve, and the throttle position sensor, which detects the opening angle of the throttle valve.

The ECM controls the throttle motor to provide the proper throttle valve opening angle to obtain the target idle speed.

The ECM regulates the idle speed by opening and closing the throttle valve using the ETCS. The ECM concludes that the idle speed control ECM function is malfunctioning if: 1) the actual idle RPM varies more than the specified amount five times or more during a drive cycle, or 2) a learned value of the idle speed control remains at the maximum or minimum five times or more during a drive cycle. The ECM will turn on the MIL and set a DTC.

Example: If the actual idle RPM varies from the target idle RPM by more than 200*1 rpm five times during a drive cycle, the ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC is set.

*1 : RPM threshold varies with engine load.

Fig. 251: Idle Air Control System Graph
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 252: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0505)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 253: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR

IAC Function Check P0505:

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (IAC FUNCTION CHECK)
Engine Running
Idle air control Flow rate learning is enable for 3 sec. or more

IAC Range Check P0505:

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (IAC RANGE CHECK)
IAC duty ratio 10 to 90%
Battery voltage 10 V or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

IAC Functional Check P0505

Fig. 254: Typical Malfunction Thresholds (IAC Functional Check)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

IAC Range Check P0505

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (IAC RANGE CHECK)
IAC duty ratio change None

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OTHER PTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO PTC P0505)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      Only P0505 is output A
      P0505 and other DTCs are output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides P0505 are output, perform the troubleshooting for those codes first.

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK CONNECTION OF PCV HOSE

    OK: PCV hose is connected correctly and PCV hose has no damage.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    1. Check for vacuum leaks in the air induction system.

      OK: No leak in air induction system.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    2. OK: CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )

DTC P0560: SYSTEM VOLTAGE

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The battery supplies electricity to the ECM even when the ignition switch is OFF. This electricity allows the ECM to store data such as DTC history, freeze frame data, fuel trim values and other data. If the battery voltage falls below a minimum level, the ECM will conclude that there is a fault in the power supply circuit. The next time the engine starts, the ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC will be set.

Fig. 255: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0560)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

If DTC P0560 is present, the ECM will not store other DTCs.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0560: ECM system voltage
Required sensors/ components (Main) ECM
Required sensors/ components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 3 sec.
MIL operation Immediate (MIL will illuminate after the next engine start)
Sequence operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS ()
ECM power source Less than 3.5 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 256: System Voltage Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. INSPECT FUSE (EFI NO. 1)
    1. Remove the EFI NO. 1 fuse from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI NO. 1 fuse.

      Fig. 257: Locating EFI No.1 Fuse
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard: Below 1 ohms

    1. OK: REPLACE FUSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT ECM (BATT VOLTAGE)
    1. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 258: Inspecting ECM (Battery Voltage)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-3 (BATT) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - EFI NO. 1 FUSE, EFI NO. 1 FUSE - BATTERY)
    1. Check the wire harness between the EFI NO. 1 fuse and ECM.
      1. Remove the EFI NO. 1 fuse from the engine room J/B.
      2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 259: Identifying ECM Test Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      J/B EFI NO. 1 fuse terminal 2 - E5-3 (BATT) Below 1 ohms
      J/B EFI NO 1 fuse terminal 2 or E5-3 (BATT) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the EFI NO. 1 fuse and battery.
      1. Remove the EFI NO. 1 fuse from the engine room J/B.
      2. Disconnect the battery positive cable.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 260: Identifying EFI No. 1 Fuse
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      Battery positive cable - J/B EFI NO. 1 fuse terminal 1 Below 1 ohms
      Battery positive cable or J/B EFI NO. 1 fuse terminal 1 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: CHECK AND REPLACE ENGINE ROOM J/B

DTC P0604, P0606, P0607, P0657: INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE/ECM-PCM/SUPPLY VOLTAGE

  • DTC P0604: INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR
  • DTC P0606 ECM/PCM PROCESSOR
  • DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE
  • DTC P0657 ACTUATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT/OPEN

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM continuously monitors it's internal memory status, internal circuits, and output signals to the throttle actuator. This self-check insures that the ECM is functioning properly. If any malfunction is detected, the ECM will set the appropriate DTC and illuminate the MIL.

The ECM memory status is diagnosed by internal "mirroring" of the main CPU and the sub CPU to detect random access memory (RAM) errors. The two CPUs also perform continuous mutual monitoring. The ECM sets a DTC if: 1) outputs from the 2 CPUs are different and deviate from the standards, 2) the signals to the throttle actuator deviate from the standards, 3) a malfunction is found in the throttle actuator supply voltage, and 4) any other ECM malfunction is found.

Fig. 261: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0604/0606/0607/0657)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 262: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

All:

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

HO2S circuit in ECM P0606

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (HO2S CIRCUIT IN ECM)
HO2S impedance (P0136 or P0137) Measuring

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

RAM Error P0604

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (RAM ERROR)
RAM Failure

TP and APP sensor circuit in ECM P0606

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (TP AND APP SENSOR CIRCUIT IN ECM)
Either of the following condition is met:  
Difference between TP of main CPU and TP of sub CPU 0.3 V or more
Difference between APP of main CPU and APP of sub CPU 0.3 V or more

HO2S circuit in ECM P0606

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (HO2S CIRCUIT IN ECM)
Transistor Malfunction

ETCS power supply circuit in ECM P0657

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (ETCS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT IN ECM)
ETCS power supply when ignition switch OFF to ON 7 V or more

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P0617: STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT HIGH

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

While the engine is being cranked, the battery positive voltage is applied to terminal STA of the ECM. If the vehicle is being driven and the ECM detects the starter control signal (STA), the ECM concludes that the starter control circuit is malfunctioning. The ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC is set.

Fig. 263: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0617)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P0617: Starter signal
Required sensors/ components (Main) Starter relay and PNP switch,
Required sensors/ components (Related) CKP sensor and vehicle speed sensor
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 20 sec.
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph) or more
Engine RPM 1,000 rpm or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Starter signal ON

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 264: Starter Relay Circuit Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester:

  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (STA SIGNAL)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester main switch.
    3. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/STARTER SIG. Read the values.

      Result:

      STA SIGNAL RESULT
      Ignition Switch Condition ON START
      STA signal OFF ON

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (See DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT) )

    OK:

    When shift lever is in the N position, the PNP switch is ON.

    When shift lever is in the P position, the PNP switch is OFF.

    1. NG: REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (See REPLACEMENT ) (Go to step 3 AFTER REPLACEMENT)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (STA SIGNAL)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester main switch.
    3. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/STARTER SIG. Read the values.

      Result:

      STA SIGNAL RESULT
      Ignition Switch Condition ON START
      STA signal OFF ON

    1. OK: SYSTEM OK
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY
    1. Measure the resistance of the ignition switch terminals.

      Fig. 265: Identifying Ignition Switch Assembly Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 266: Ignition Switch Resistance Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (Go to next step 5 AFTER REPLACEMENT)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (STA SIGNAL)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester main switch.
    3. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL/STARTER SIG. Read the values.

      Result:

      STA SIGNAL RESULT
      Ignition Switch Condition ON START
      STA Signal OFF ON

    1. OK: SYSTEM OK
    2. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

OBD II scan tool (excluding Hand-held Tester):

  1. INSPECT ECM
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 267: Identifying ECM Voltage Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      E7-17 (STA) - E9-1 (E1) Ignition switch ON 0 V
      E7-17 (STA) - E9-1 (E1) Engine cranking 6 V or more

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (See DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT) )
    1. NG: REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (See REPLACEMENT ) (Go to next step 3 AFTER REPLACEMENT)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM
    1. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 268: Identifying ECM Voltage Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      E7-17 (STA) - E9-1 (E1) Ignition switch ON 0 V
      E7-17 (STA) - E9-1 (E1) Engine cranking 6 V or more

    1. OK: SYSTEM OK
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY
    1. Measure the resistance of the ignition switch terminals.

      Fig. 269: Identifying Ignition Switch Assembly Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 270: Ignition Switch Resistance Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. INSPECT ECM
    1. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 271: Identifying ECM Voltage Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      E7-17 (STA) - E9-1 (E1) Ignition switch ON 0 V
      E7-17 (STA) - E9-1 (E1) Engine cranking 6 V or more

    1. OK: SYSTEM OK
    2. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

DTC P0705: TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

When the shift lever is in the N or P position: 1) the Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch turns on, and 2) ECM terminal NSW is grounded to the body ground via the starter relay and voltage becomes 0 V. When the shift lever is in the D, 2, L or R position: 1) the PNP switch turns off, and 2) ECM terminal NSW receives current and becomes the voltage of the ECM internal power source.

If the shift lever is moved from the N position to the D position, this signal is used for air-fuel ratio correction and for idle speed control (estimated control).

Fig. 272: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P0705)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

After confirming DTC P0705, use the hand-held tester to confirm the PNP switch signal in the ALL menu (to reach the ALL menu: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL).

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT) .

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to DTC P0705 on DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT) .

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

DTC P2102, P2103: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT

  • DTC P2102: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW
  • DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The throttle actuator is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.

The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor which is mounted on the throttle body. The throttle position sensor provides feedback to the ECM. This feedback allows the ECM to control the throttle actuator and monitor the throttle opening angle as the ECM responds to driver inputs.

HINT:

This Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) does not use a throttle cable.

Fig. 273: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2102/2103)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM monitors the flow of electrical current through the electronic throttle actuator, and detects malfunctions or open circuits in the throttle motor based on the value of the electrical current. When the current deviates from the standard, the ECM concludes that there is a fault in the throttle motor. Or, if the throttle valve is not functioning properly (for example, stuck on) the ECM concludes that there is a fault and turns on the MIL and a DTC is set.

Example: When the current is more than 10 A. Or the current is less than 0.5 A when the actuator driving duty ratio is more than 80 %. The ECM concludes that the current is deviated from the standard, turns on the MIL and a DTC is set.

FAIL-SAFE

If the ETCS has a malfunction, the ECM cuts off current to the throttle actuator. The throttle control valve returns to a predetermined opening angle (approximately 16°) by the force of the return spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle to enable the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and slowly, the vehicle can be driven slowly.

If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 274: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

P2102

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P2102)
Throttle actuator duty ratio 80 % or more
Throttle actuator power supply 8 V or more

P2103

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P2103)
Throttle actuator power supply 8 V or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P2102

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2102)
Throttle actuator current Less than 0.5 A

P2103

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P2103)
Either of the following conditions is set:  
Hybrid IC diagnosis signal (Throttle actuator current is 10 A or more) Fail (for 0.1 sec.)
Hybrid IC current limiter port (Throttle actuator current is 7 A or more) Fail (for 0.6 sec.)

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 275: Throttle Actuator Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY (THROTTLE ACTUATOR)
    1. Disconnect the T13 throttle actuator connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the throttle actuator terminals.

      Fig. 276: Identifying Throttle Actuator Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      T13-2 (M+) - T13-1 (M-) 0.3 to 100 ohms (20 °C (68° F))

    1. NG: REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (THROTTLE ACTUATOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the T13 throttle actuator connector.
    2. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 277: Identifying Throttle Actuator & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 278: Testing Harness Resistance
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT THROTTLE BODY ASSY
    1. Visually check for foreign objects between the throttle valve and the housing. Also, check if the valve can open and close smoothly.

      OK: The throttle valve is not contaminated with foreign objects and can move smoothly.

    1. NG: REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT AND CLEAN THROTTLE BODY
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P2111, P2112: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

  • DTC P2111: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - STUCK OPEN
  • DTC P2112 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - STUCK CLOSED

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The throttle actuator is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve using gears. The opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor, which is mounted on the throttle body. The throttle position sensor provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle actuator and set the throttle valve angle in response to driver inputs.

HINT:

This Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) does not use a throttle cable.

Fig. 279: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2111/2112)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM concludes that there is a malfunction of the ETCS when the throttle valve remains at a fixed angle despite high drive current from the ECM. The ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC is set.

FAIL-SAFE

If the ETCS has a malfunction, the ECM cuts off current to the throttle actuator. The throttle control valve returns to a predetermined opening angle (approximately 16°) by the force of the return spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle to enable the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and slowly, the vehicle can be driven slowly.

If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 280: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

All

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (ALL)
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

P2111

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P2111)
Throttle motor current 2 A or more
Throttle actuator close duty ratio 80 % or more

P2112

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P2112)
Throttle motor current 2 A or more
Throttle actuator open duty ratio 80 % or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
TP (throttle position) sensor voltage change for 0.016 second Less than 0.1 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT

    DTC OUTPUT RESULT
    Display (DTC output) Proceed to
    P2111 or P2112 A
    P2111 or P2112 and other DTCs B

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK THROTTLE BODY ASSY (VISUALLY CHECK THROTTLE VALVE)

    Check for contamination between the throttle valve and the housing. If necessary, clean the throttle body. And check that the throttle valve moves smoothly.

    OK: The throttle valve is not contaminated with foreign objects and can move smoothly.

    1. NG: REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK PTC OUTPUT
    1. Clear the DTC (See DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Start the engine, and depress and release the accelerator pedal quickly (fully open and fully close).
    3. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display (DTC output) Proceed to
      No DTC A
      P2111 and/or P2112 B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. A: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)

DTC P2118: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CURRENT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) has a dedicated power supply circuit. The voltage (+BM) is monitored and when the voltage is low (less than 4 V), the ECM concludes that the ETCS has a fault and current to the throttle actuator is cut.

When the voltage becomes unstable, the ETCS itself becomes unstable. For this reason, when the voltage is low, the current to the actuator is cut. If repairs are made and the system has returned to normal, turn the ignition switch OFF. The ECM then allows current to flow to the actuator and actuator can be restarted.

HINT:

This ETCS does not use a throttle cable.

Fig. 281: Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 282: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2118)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM monitors the battery supply voltage applied to the electronic throttle actuator. When the power supply voltage drops below the threshold, the ECM concludes that the power supply circuit has an open circuit. A DTC is set and the MIL is turned on.

FAIL-SAFE

If the ETCS has a malfunction, the ECM cuts off current to the throttle actuator. The throttle control valve returns to a predetermined opening angle (approximately 16°) by the force of the return spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle to enable the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and slowly, the vehicle can be driven slowly. If a "pass" condition is detected and the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P2118: Throttle actuator power supply
Required sensors/ components (Main) Throttle actuator, ETCS fuse
Required sensors/ components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 0.8 seconds
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
Battery voltage More than 8 V

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Throttle actuator power supply voltage Less than 4 V

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
Throttle actuator power supply voltage 9 to 14 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 283: Throttle Actuator Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK FUSE (ETCS)
    1. Remove the ETCS fuse from the engine room R/B No. 2.
    2. Measure the resistance of the ETCS fuse.

      Fig. 284: Locating Engine Room R/B No.2 ETCS Fuse
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard: Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE FUSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT ECM (+BM VOLTAGE)
    1. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 285: Identifying EMC Voltage Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E6-6 (+BM) - E9-4 (ME01) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - ETCS FUSE, ETCS FUSE - BATTERY)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ETCS fuse and ECM.
      1. Remove the ETCS fuse from the engine room R/B No. 2.
      2. Disconnect the E6 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 286: Checking Wire Harness Between ETCS Fuse And ECM
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      R/B No. 2 ETCS fuse terminal 2 - E6-6 (+BM) Below 1 ohms
      R/B No. 2 ETCS fuse terminal 2 or E6-6 (+BM) - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the ETCS fuse and battery.
      1. Remove the ETCS fuse from the engine room R/B No. 2.
      2. Disconnect the battery positive cable.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 287: Locating Engine Room J/B No.2 ETCS Fuse
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      Battery positive cable - R/B No. 2 ETCS fuse terminal 1 Below 1 ohms
      Battery positive cable or R/B No. 2 ETCS fuse terminal - Body ground 1 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: CHECK ENGINE ROOM RELAY BLOCK NO.2

DTC P2119: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL THROTTLE BODY RANGE/PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) is composed of a throttle actuator that operates the throttle valve, a throttle position sensor that detects the opening angle of the throttle valve, an accelerator pedal position sensor that detects the accelerator pedal position, and the ECM that controls the ETCS system. The ECM operates the throttle actuator to position the throttle valve for proper response to driver inputs. The throttle position sensor, mounted on the throttle body, detects the opening angle of the throttle valve and provides this signal to the ECM so that the ECM can regulate the throttle actuator.

Fig. 288: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2119)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The ECM determines the "actual" throttle angle based on the throttle position sensor signal. The "actual" throttle position is compared to the "target" throttle position commanded by the ECM. If the difference of these two values exceeds a specified limit, the ECM interprets this as a fault in the ETCS system. The ECM turns on the MIL and a DTC is set.

FAIL-SAFE

If the ETCS has a malfunction, the ECM cuts off current to the throttle actuator. The throttle control valve returns to a predetermined opening angle (approximately 16°) by the force of the return spring. The ECM then adjusts the engine output by controlling the fuel injection (intermittent fuel-cut) and ignition timing in accordance with the accelerator pedal opening angle to enable the vehicle to continue at a minimal speed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed firmly and slowly, the vehicle can be driven slowly. If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P2119: ETCS malfunction
Required sensors/ components (Main) Throttle actuator
Required sensors/ components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 1 sec.
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Difference between "target TP (Throttle position)" and "actual TP" 0.3 V or more

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

  1. CHECK OTHER PTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO PTC P2119)

    DTC OUTPUT RESULT
    Display (DTC output) Proceed to
    Only P2119 is output A
    P2119 and other codes are output B

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK IF DTC OUTPUT REOCCURS
    1. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Allow the engine to idle for 15 seconds.
    3. Pull the hand brake and shift the gear to D.
    4. Depress the brake pedal securely and the accelerator pedal fully for 5 seconds.
    5. Read the DTC.

      HINT:

      Actual throttle position (TP) sensor voltage can be confirmed using the hand-held tester [DATA LIST/ALL /THROTTLE POS #1].

      OK: No DTC is output.

    1. OK: NORMAL
    2. NG: REPLACE THROTTLE BODY ASSY

DTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2138: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH CIRCUIT

  • DTC P2120: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "D" CIRCUIT
  • DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "D" CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
  • DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "D" CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
  • DTC P2125 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "E" CIRCUIT
  • DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "E" CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
  • DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "E" CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
  • DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "D"/"E" VOLTAGE CORRELATION

HINT:

This is the repair procedure for the "accelerator pedal position sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

HINT:

  • This Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) does not use a throttle cable.
  • This is procedure of accelerator pedal position sensor.

The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor is mounted in the accelerator pedal to detect the angle of the accelerator pedal. This sensor is electronically controlled and uses Hall-effect elements.

In the accelerator pedal position sensor, the voltage applied to terminals VPA and VPA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the angle of the accelerator pedal. The VPA is a signal to indicate the actual accelerator pedal angle and is used for the engine control. VPA2 is used to detect malfunctions of the sensor itself.

The ECM monitors the accelerator pedal angle from VPA and VPA2 signal outputs, and controls the throttle motor based on these signals.

Fig. 289: Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Diagram And Voltage Curve
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 290: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2138)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

After confirming DTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128 and P2138, use the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to confirm the accelerator pedal position sensor output voltage.

Fig. 291: Accelerator Pedal Position Specific Output Voltage Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When VPA or VPA2 deviates from the standard, or the difference between the voltage outputs of the two sensors is less than the threshold, the ECM concludes that there is a defect in the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM turns on the MIL and a DTC is set.

Example: When the voltage output of the VPA is below 0.2 V or exceeds 4.8 V.

FAIL-SAFE

The accelerator pedal position sensor has 2 (main and sub) sensor circuits. If a malfunction occurs in either of the sensor circuits, the ECM detects the abnormal signal voltage difference between the 2 sensor circuits and switches to fail-safe mode. In fail-safe mode, the remaining circuit is used to calculate the accelerator pedal opening to allow the vehicle to continue driving.

If both circuits malfunction, the ECM regards the opening angle of the accelerator pedal to be fully closed. In this case, the throttle valve will remain closed as if the engine is idling.

If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 292: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P2120

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2120)
VPA voltage 0.2 V or less or 4.8 V or more

P2122

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2122)
VPA voltage when VPA2 output indicate accel pedal is opened 0.2 V or less

P2123

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2123)
VPA voltage 4.8 V or more

P2125

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2125)
VPA2 voltage 0.5 V or less or 4.8 V or more

P2127

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2127)
VPA2 voltage when VPA output indicate accel pedal is opened 0.5 V or less

P2128

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2128)
VPA2 voltage when VPA is 0.2 to 3.45 V 4.8 V or more

P2138

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2138)
Either of the following conditions is met: Condition A or B
Condition A  
Difference between VPA and VPA2 voltage 0.02 V or less
Condition B  
VPA voltage 0.2 V or less
VPA2 voltage 0.5 V or less

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE

COMPONENT OPERATING RANGE SPECIFICATIONS
VPA voltage 0.5 to 4.5 V
VPA2 voltage 1.2 to 4.8 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 293: Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester

  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (ACCEL POS #1 AND ACCEL POS #2)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ETCS/ACCEL POS #1 and ACCEL POS #2" and read its value displayed on the hand-held tester.

      Fig. 294: Identifying Accelerator Pedal Position
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
      Accelerator Pedal ACCEL POS #1 ACCEL POS #2
      Released 0.5 to 1.1 V 1.2 to 2.0 V
      Depressed 2.6 to 4.5 V 3.4 to 5.3 V

    1. OK: Go to step 5.
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the A27 sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 295: Identifying Wire Harness Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 296: Harness Resistance Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM (VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE)
    1. Disconnect the A27 sensor connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 297: Inspecting ECM (VCPA And VCP2 Voltage)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 298: Tester Connection And Voltage Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. READ OUTPUT DTC (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Start the engine.
    3. Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds or more.
    4. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128 and/or P2138 are output again A
      No DTC output B

    1. B: SYSTEM OK
    2. A: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the A27 sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 299: Identifying Wire Harness Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 300: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT ECM (VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE)
    1. Disconnect the A27 sensor connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage of the ECM connector.

      Fig. 301: Inspecting ECM (VCPA And VCP2 Voltage)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 302: Harness Voltage Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. READ OUTPUT DTC (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    2. Start the engine.
    3. Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds or more.
    4. Read the DTC.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display (DTC Output) Proceed to
      P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128 and/or P2138 are output again A
      No DTC output B

    1. B: SYSTEM OK
    2. A: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P2121: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH "D" CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

HINT:

This is repair procedure for the "accelerator pedal position sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to wiring inDTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2138: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH CIRCUIT.

Fig. 303: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2121)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket. The accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensor elements/signal outputs: VPA and VPA2. VPA is used to detect the actual accelerator pedal angle (used for engine control) and VPA2 is used to detect malfunction in VPA. When the difference between the voltage outputs of VPA and VPA2 deviate from the standard, the ECM concludes the accelerator pedal position sensor has a malfunction. The ECM turns on the MIL and a DTC is set.

FAIL-SAFE

The accelerator pedal position sensor has 2 (main and sub) sensor circuits. If a malfunction occurs in either of the sensor circuits, the ECM detects the abnormal signal voltage difference between the 2 sensor circuits and switches to fail-safe mode. In fail-safe mode, the remaining circuit is used to calculate the accelerator pedal opening to allow the vehicle to continue driving.

If both circuits malfunction, the ECM regards the opening angle of the accelerator pedal to be fully closed. In this case, the throttle valve will remain closed as if the engine is idling.

If a "pass" condition is detected and then the ignition switch is turned OFF, the fail-safe operation will stop and the system will return to normal condition.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P2121: TP sensor malfunction
Required sensors/ components (Main) Accelerator position sensor
Required sensors/ components (Related) -
Frequency of operation Continuous
Duration 0.5 sec.
MIL operation Immediate
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present None
ECT power ON
Ignition switch ON

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Learned voltage value of (VTA1 - VTA2) Less than 0.4 V or more than 1.2 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2120, P2122, P2123, P2125, P2127, P2128, P2138: THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH CIRCUIT.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.

Hand-held tester:

  1. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER (ACCEL POS #1, ACCEL POS #2)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ETCS/ACCEL POS #1 and ACCEL POS #2" and read its value displayed on the hand-held tester.

      Standard:

      ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS
      Accelerator Pedal ACCEL POS #1 ACCEL POS #2
      Released 0.5 to 1.1 V 1.2 to 2.0 V
      Depressed 2.6 to 4.5 V 3.4 to 5.3 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the A27 sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 304: Identifying Wire Harness Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 305: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. INSPECT ECM (VPA AND VPA2 VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E5 ECM connector.

      Fig. 306: Identifying ECM Connector Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 307: Acceleartor Pedal Position Voltage Specifications
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the A27 sensor connector.
    2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
    3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 308: Identifying Wire Harness Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor & ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 309: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ROD ASSY (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

  • DTC P2195: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
  • DTC P2196 OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

HINT:

Although the title (DTC description) says "oxygen sensor", this DTC is related to the "A/F sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Air-Fuel ratio (A/F) sensor provides output voltage* approximately equal to the existing air-fuel ratio.

The A/F sensor output voltage is used to provide feedback for the ECM to control the air-fuel ratio.

With the A/F sensor output, the ECM can determine deviation from the stoichiometric air-fuel ratio and control proper injection time. If the A/F sensor is malfunctioning, the ECM is unable to accurately control air-fuel ratio.

The A/F sensor is equipped with a heater which heats the zirconia element. The heater is also controlled by the ECM. When the intake air volume is low (the temperature of the exhaust gas is low), current flows to the heater which heats the sensor to facilitate detection of accurate oxygen concentration. The A/F sensor is a planar type. Compared to a conventional type, the sensor and heater portions are narrower. Because the heat of the heater is conducted through the alumina to zirconia (of the sensor portion), sensor activation is accelerated.

To obtain a high purification rate of the CO, HC and NOx components of the exhaust gas, a three-way catalytic converter is used. The converter is most efficient when the air-fuel ratio is maintained near the stoichiometric air-fuel ratio.

HINT:

*: The voltage value changes the inside of the ECM only.

Fig. 310: Identifying Air Fuel Sensor Components And A/F Ratio A/F Sensor Voltage Graph
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 311: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2195/2196)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

HINT:

  • DTCs P2195 and P2196 indicate a malfunction related to bank 1 of the A/F sensor circuit.
  • Sensor 1 refers to the sensor closest to the engine assembly.
  • After confirming DTC P2195 and P2196, use the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to confirm A/F sensor output voltage (AFS B1S1) from the ALL menu (to reach the ALL menu: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DATA LIST/ALL).
  • The A/F sensor's output voltage and the short-term fuel trim value can be read using the OBD II scan tool or the hand-held tester.
  • The ECM controls the voltage of the A1A+ and A1 A- terminals of the ECM to a fixed voltage. Therefore, it is impossible to confirm the A/F sensor output voltage without the OBD II scan tool or the handheld tester.
  • The OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester) displays one fifth of the A/F sensor output voltage which is displayed on the hand-held tester.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Under the air-fuel ratio feedback control, if the voltage output of the A/F sensor indicates RICH or LEAN for a certain period of time or more, the ECM concludes that there is a fault in the A/F sensor system. The ECM will turn on the MIL and a DTC is set.

Example: If the A/F sensor voltage output is less than 2.8 V (very RICH) for 10 seconds even though voltage output of the heated oxygen sensor output voltage is less than 0.85 V, the ECM sets DTC P2196 or DTC P2198. If the heated oxygen sensor output voltage is 0.15 V or more but the A/F sensor voltage output is more than 3.8 V (very LEAN) for 10 seconds, DTC P2195 is set.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 312: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Time after engine start 30 sec. or more
A/F sensor status Activated
Fuel system status Closed Loop
Engine condition Running

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

P2195 and P2197

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2195 AND P2197)
Both of the following conditions are met:  
A/F sensor voltage More than 3.8 V
Rear HO2S voltage 0.15 V or more

P2196 and P2198

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (P2196 AND P2198)
Both of the following conditions are met:  
A/F sensor voltage Less than 2.8 V
Rear HO2S voltage Less than 0.85 V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 313: A/F Sensor Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

Fig. 314: Identifying Confirmation Driving Pattern
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
  2. Switch the hand-held tester from normal mode to check mode (see CHECK MODE PROCEDURE).
  3. Start the engine and warm it up with all the accessory switched OFF.
  4. Drive the vehicle at 38 to 75 mph (60 to 120 km/h) and engine speed at 1,400 to 3,200 rpm for 3 to 5 minutes.

    HINT:

    If a malfunction exists, the MIL will be illuminated during step (d).

    NOTE: If the conditions in this test are not strictly followed, detection of a malfunction will not occur. If you do not have a hand-held tester, turn the ignition switch OFF after performing steps (c) and (d), then perform steps (c) and (d) again.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Hand-held tester only:

It is possible the malfunctioning area can be found using the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation. The A/F CONTROL operation can determine if the A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning or not.

  1. Perform the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation.

    HINT:

    The A/F CONTROL operation lowers the injection volume 12.5% or increases the injection volume 25%.

    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL.
    5. Perform the A/F CONTROL operation with the engine idle (press the right or left button).

    Result:

    A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

    +25 % --> RICH output: Less than 3.0 V

    -12.5 % --> LEAN output: More than 3.35 V

    Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

    +25 % --> RICH output: More than 0.55 V

    -12.5 % --> LEAN output: Less than 0.4 V

    NOTE: The A/F sensor output has a few seconds of delay and the heated oxygen sensor output has about 20 seconds of delay.

    Fig. 315: A/F Control Active Test Result Chart
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables a technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and the heated oxygen sensor.

    For displaying the graph, enter "ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA", select "AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2" by pressing "YES" and push "ENTER". Then press "F4".

    HINT:

    • If DTC P2195 or P2196 is displayed, check bank 1 sensor 1 circuit.
    • A low A/F sensor voltage could be caused by a RICH air-fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run with a RICH air-fuel mixture.
    • A high A/F sensor voltage could be caused by a LEAN air-fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run with a LEAN air-fuel mixture.
    • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO A/F SENSOR DTC)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are output A
      A/F sensor circuit DTC and other codes are output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides A/F sensor DTC are output, perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first.

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. READ VALUE OF HAND-HELD TESTER OR OBD II SCAN TOOL (OUTPUT VOLT- AGE OF A/F SENSOR)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Warm up the A/F sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    3. Read A/F sensor voltage output on the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.
    4. Hand-held tester only:

      On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/SNAPSHOT/MANUAL SNAPSHOT/USER DATA. Read the values.

    5. Select "AFS B1S1/ENGINE SPD" and press YES.
    6. Monitor the A/F sensor voltage carefully.
    7. Check the A/F sensor voltage output under the following conditions:
      1. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
      2. Run the engine at approximately 2,500 rpm. Do not suddenly change the rpm.
      3. Raise the engine to 4,000 rpm and quickly release the accelerator pedal so that the throttle is fully closed.

      Standard:

      Condition (1) and (2)

      Voltage change of 3.3 V (0.66 V)* (between approximately 3.1 to 3.5 V) as shown in the illustration.

      Condition (3)

      A/F sensor voltage increases to 3.8 V (0.76 V)* or more during engine deceleration when fuel is cut as shown in the illustration.

      *: Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool.

      Fig. 316: Engine RPM And A/F Sensor Voltage Normal And Malfunction Condition
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      HINT:

      • Whenever the A/F sensor output voltage remains at approximately 3.3 V (0.660 V) on scan tool under any condition as well as the above conditions, the A/F sensor may have an open circuit. This will happen also when the A/F sensor heater has an open circuit. See Fig. 316.
      • Whenever the A/F sensor output voltage remains at a certain value of approximately 3.8 V (0.76 V) on scan tool or more, or 2.8 V (0.56 V) on scan tool or less under any condition as well as the above conditions, the A/F sensor may have a short circuit. See Fig. 316.
      • The ECM will stop fuel injection (fuel is cut) during engine deceleration. This will cause a LEAN condition and should result in a momentary increase in the A/F sensor output voltage.
      • The ECM must establish a closed throttle position learned value to perform fuel cut. If the battery terminal has been disconnected, the vehicle must be driven over 10 mph (16 km/h) to allow the ECM to learn the closed throttle position.
      • When the vehicle is driven:
      • The output voltage of the A/F sensor may be below 2.8 V (0.76 V) on scan tool during fuel enrichment. For the vehicle, this translates to a sudden increase in speed with the accelerator pedal fully depressed when trying to overtake another vehicle. The A/F sensor is functioning normally.
      • The A/F sensor is a current output element, and therefore the current is converted into voltage inside the ECM. If measuring voltage at connectors of A/F sensor or ECM, you will observe a constant voltage.
    1. OK: Go to step 13.
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the A/F sensor terminals.

      Fig. 317: Identifying Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 (HT) - 2 (+B) 20°C (68°F) 1.8 to 3.4 ohms
      1 (HT) - 4 (AF-) - 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 318: Identifying EFI Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (A/F SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and A/F sensor.
      1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
      2. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 319: Identifying A/F Sensor Terminals (Wire Harness Side)
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 320: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 321: A/F Sensor And EFI Relay Wiring Diagram
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    1. Check for vacuum leaks in the air induction system.

      OK: No leak in the air induction system.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )
    1. Check fuel pressure (high or low fuel pressure).

      Standard:

      FUEL PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS
      Item Specified Condition
      Fuel pressure 304 to 343 kPa (3.1 to 3.5 kgf/cm2 , 44 to 55 psi)

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See INSPECTION )
    1. Check injector injection (high or low fuel injection quantity or poor injection pattern).

      Standard:

      INJECTION VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS
      Injection Volume Difference Between Each Injector
      76 to 91 cm3 (4.6 to 5.5 cu in.)/15 seconds 15 cm3 (0.9 cu in.) or less

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See appropriate Fuel Systems article)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern.

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. READ OUTPUT DTC
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are not output A
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are output B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT ) AND PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  12. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST

    OK: Vehicle has run out of fuel in past.

    1. NO: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. YES: DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
  13. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern.

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  14. GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (A/F SENSOR DTC OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are output A
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are not output B

    1. B: Go to step 18.
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  15. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  16. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern.

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  17. READ OUTPUT DTC (A/F SENSOR DTC OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are not output A
      A/F sensor circuit DTC are output B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT ) AND PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  18. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST

    OK: Vehicle has run out of fuel in past.

    1. NO: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. YES: DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

DTC P2238, P2239, P2252, P2253: OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

  • DTC P2238: OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT LOW (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
  • DTC P2239 OXYGEN SENSOR PUMPING CURRENT CIRCUIT HIGH (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
  • DTC P2252 OXYGEN SENSOR REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT LOW (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)
  • DTC P2253 OXYGEN SENSOR REFERENCE GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH (FOR A/F SENSOR)(BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

HINT:

Although the title (DTC description) says "oxygen sensor", this DTC is related to the "A/F sensor".

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to wiring in DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1).

Fig. 322: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2238/2239)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

The air-fuel ratio (A/F) sensor varies its voltage output in proportion to the air-fuel ratio. If impedance (alternating current resistance) or voltage output of the sensor deviates greatly from the standard, the ECM determines if an open or short malfunction is in the A/F sensor circuit.

MONITOR STRATEGY

Fig. 323: Monitor Strategy Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR

A/F sensor open circuit between AF+ and AF- P2238

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (A/F SENSOR OPEN CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF+ AND AF-)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
ECT 20°C (68°F)
Engine condition Running
Time after engine start 20 sec. or more
Time after A/F sensor heating 20 sec. or more
Time after ignition switch OFF to ON 5 sec. or more

P2238 (except above), P2239, P2252, P2253

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (P2238)
Battery Voltage 10.5 V or more
Time after ignition switch is OFF to ON 5 sec. or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

A/F sensor open circuit between AF+ and AF- P2238

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (A/F SENSOR OPEN CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF+ AND AF-)
A/F sensor admittance Less than 0.022 1/ohms

A/F sensor short circuit between AF+ and AF- P2238

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (A/F SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF+ AND AF-)
AF+ terminal -AF- terminal voltage 0.1 V or less

A/F sensor short circuit between AF+ and GND P2238

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (A/F SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF+ AND GND)
AF+ voltage Less than 0.5 V

A/F sensor short circuit between AF+ and +B P2239

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (A/F SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF+ AND +B)
AF+ voltage 4.5 V or more

A/F sensor short circuit between AF- and GND P2252

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (A/F SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF- AND GND)
AF- voltage Less than 0.5 V

A/F sensor short circuit between AF- and +B P2253

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS (A/F SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN AF- AND +B)
AF- voltage 4.5 V or more

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1).

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Hand-held tester only:

It is possible the malfunctioning area can be found using the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation. The A/F CONTROL operation can determine if the A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning or not.

  1. Perform the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation.

    HINT:

    The A/F CONTROL operation lowers the injection volume 12.5 % or increases the injection volume 25 %.

    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL.
    5. Perform the A/F CONTROL operation with the engine idle (press the right or left button).

    Result:

    A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

    +25 % --> RICH output: Less than 3.0 V

    -12.5 % --> LEAN output: More than 3.35 V

    Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

    +25 % --> RICH output: More than 0.55 V

    -12.5 % --> LEAN output: Less than 0.4 V

    NOTE: The A/F sensor output has a few seconds of delay and the heated oxygen sensor output has about 20 seconds of delay at maximum.

    Fig. 324: Active Test Result Chart
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables a technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and the heated oxygen sensor.

    For displaying the graph, enter "ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA", select "AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2" by pressing "YES" and push "ENTER". Then press "F4".

    HINT:

    • If DTC P2237, P2238, P2239, P2251, P2252 or P2253 is displayed, check the bank 1 sensor 1 circuit.
    • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the A/F sensor terminals.

      Fig. 325: Identifying Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 (HT) - 2 (+B) 20°C (68°F) 1.8 to 3.4 ohms
      1 (HT) - 4 (AF-) - 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 326: Identifying EFI Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 (when Below 1 ohms battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (A/F SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and A/F sensor.
      1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
      2. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 327: Identifying A/F Sensor & ECM Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 328: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 329: A/F Sensor And EFI Relay Circuit Diagram
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

DTC P2401, P2402: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

  • DTC P2401: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
  • DTC P2402 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 330: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2401/2402)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

Fig. 331: Monitor Description Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 332: EVAP Leak And Pressure Measurement Checking System Diagram (A-D)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. P2401: Vacuum pump stuck OFF

    For order C, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through the 0.02 inch orifice and pressure is measured. If the pressure is higher than -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or lower than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa), the ECM determines that the vacuum pump is stuck OFF (has not operated). The ECM illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    2. Fig. 333: EVAP Pressure Leak Graph (Vacuum Pump Stuck Off)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  2. P2402: Vacuum pump stuck ON

    If the difference in EVAP system pressure for order A and C is small and is higher than -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa), ECM determines that the vacuum pump is stuck ON (has been operating throughout order A to C). The ECM illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    3. Fig. 334: EVAP Pressure Leak Graph (Vacuum Pump Stuck On)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Purge VSV and pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 15 minutes (varies with amount of fuel in tank)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

"Saturated" indicates EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds.

  1. P2401: Vacuum pump stuck OFF

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (VACUUM PUMP STUCK OFF)
    Either of the following conditions is set  
    0.02 inch leak pressure -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or more, or less than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa)
    0.02 inch leak pressure Not saturated

  2. P2402: Vacuum pump stuck ON

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (VACUUM PUMP STUCK ON)
    Either of the following conditions is set  
    0.02 inch leak pressure -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or more, or less than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa)
    0.02 inch leak pressure Not saturated

MONITOR STATUS

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

DTC P2419, P2420: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT

  • DTC P2419: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
  • DTC P2420 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 335: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2419/2420)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

Fig. 336: Monitor Description Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 337: EVAP Leak And Pressure Measurement Checking System Diagram (A-D)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. P2419: Vent valve stuck ON

    For order C, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through 0.02 inch orifice and pressure is measured. The ECM determines that the vent valve is stuck ON (closed) if: 1) the pressure is higher than -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or lower than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa); and 2) the EVAP system pressure does not stabilize for a duration of 60 seconds. The ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    Fig. 338: EVAP Pressure Leak Graph (Vent Valve Stuck ON)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  2. P2420: Vent valve stuck OFF

    If difference in EVAP pressure in EVAP system pressure for order C and D is small and does not increase more than 2.25 mmHg (0.3 kPa) within 10 seconds of changing the vent valve from OFF (vent) to ON (closed), the ECM determines that the vent valve is stuck OFF (vent).

    Fig. 339: EVAP Pressure Leak Graph (Vent Valve Stuck OFF)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Purge VSV and pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 15 minutes (varies with amount of fuel in tank)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

"Saturated" indicates EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds.

  1. Vent valve stuck ON (P2419)

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (VENT VALVE STUCK ON)
    Either of the following conditions is set  
    0.02 inch leak pressure Less than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa), or -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or more
    0.02 inch leak pressure Not saturated

  2. Vent valve stuck OFF (P2420)

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (VENT VALVE STUCK OFF)
    EVAP pressure change for 10 seconds when vent valve is turned ON after measurement of 0.02 inch leak pressure Less than 2.25 mmHg (0.3 kPa)

MONITOR STATUS

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

DTC P2421, P2422: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CHECK VALVE STUCK

  • DTC P2421: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CHECK VALVE STUCK OPEN
  • DTC P2422 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CHECK VALVE STUCK CLOSED

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The circuit description can be found in the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

Fig. 340: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2421/2422)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

Fig. 341: Monitor Description Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 342: EVAP Leak And Pressure Measurement Checking System Diagram (A-D)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  1. Check valve stuck open (P2421)

    For order E, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP system and the pressure is measured. If the pressure increases over 1.9 mmHg (0.25 kPa) within 10 seconds after the vacuum pump is turned OFF, the ECM determines that the check valve is stuck open. The ECM illuminates the MIL and sets DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    2. Fig. 343: Evap Pressure Leak Graph (Check Valve Stuck Open)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

  2. Check valve stuck closed (P2422)

    For order C, the vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) through 0.02 inch orifice and the pressure is measured. If the pressure is higher than -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or lower than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa), the ECM determines that the check valve is stuck closed. The ECM illuminates the MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

    3. Fig. 344: Evap Pressure Leak Graph (Check Valve Stuck Closed)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components Purge VSV and pump module
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration Within 15 minutes (varies with amount of fuel in tank)
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Altitude Below 2,400 m (8,000 feet)
Battery voltage 10.5 V or more
Vehicle speed Below 4 km/h (2 mph)
Ignition switch OFF
Engine Not running
Soak time (ignition switch OFF time) 5 hours
ECT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
IAT 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
Elapsed time that vehicle has been run before ignition switch OFF 5 minutes or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

"Saturated" indicates EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds.

  1. P2421: Check valve stuck open

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (CHECK VALVE STUCK OPEN)
    FTP change for 10 seconds when vacuum pump is turned OFF after leak check 1.875 mmHg 0.25 kPa) or more

  2. P2422: Check valve stuck closed

    TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS (CHECK VALVE STUCK CLOSED)
    Either of the condition A and B is set  
    0.02 inch leak pressure Less than -33.75 mmHg (-4.5 kPa) or -7.5 mmHg (-1 kPa) or more
    0.02 inch leak pressure Not saturated

MONITOR STATUS

Refer to the EVAP Inspection Procedure (see EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE).

DTC P2610: ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The soak timer is built into the ECM. To ensure that the EVAP monitor values will be accurate, the soak timer counts 5 hours (+/-15 minutes) from when the ignition switch is turned OFF. This will allow the fuel to cool down, which will stabilized the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP). When 5 hours passed, the ECM turns ON.

Fig. 345: Soak Timer Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

DTC TROUBLE DETECTION (DTC - P2610)
DTCs Monitoring Item Malfunction Condition Trouble Area Detection Timing Detection Period
P2610 Soak timer (built-in ECM) ECM internal malfunction ECM Engine running 2 trips

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

DTC P2610 is set if an internal ECM problem is detected. There are not diagnostics required. ECM replacement is required.

  1. REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. NEXT: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CONFIRM DTC (AFTER REPAIR)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Clear the DTC with the hand-held tester.
    4. Start the engine and wait 10 minutes or more.
    5. Confirm the pending DTC. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBDII/DTC INFO/PENDING DTC.
    6. If no DTC is displayed, the repair has been completed properly.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

When 5 hours have elapsed after the ignition switch is turned OFF, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in EVAP system. Then ECM monitors for leaks and actuator malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

While the engine running, the ECM is also monitoring time when the soak timer is running. When the soak timer and the ECM CPU's time values are different, the ECM interprets this as a malfunction, illuminates MIL and sets a DTC (2-trip detection logic).

OBDII MONITOR SPECIFICATION

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Required Sensors/Components ECM
Frequency of Operation Once per driving cycle
Duration 10 minutes
MIL Operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence Operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever these DTCs are not present None
Ignition switch ON
Engine Running

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Soak timer measuring when ECM CPU's clock counts 10 minutes Less than 7 minutes or more than 13 minutes

DTC P2A00: A/F SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK1 SENSOR 1)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Refer to wiring in DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1).

Fig. 346: DTC Trouble Detection Chart (DTC - P2A00)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR DESCRIPTION

Fig. 347: A/F Sensor Monitor Graph
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

The Air-Fuel ratio (A/F) sensor varies its output voltage in proportion to the air-fuel ratio. Based on the output voltage, the ECM determines if the air-fuel ratio is RICH or LEAN and adjusts the stoichiometric air-fuel ratio.

The ECM also checks the fuel injection volume compensation value to check if the A/F sensor is deteriorating or not. A/F sensor response deterioration is determined by the ratio of the A/F sensor output voltage variation and fuel trim variation.

MONITOR STRATEGY

MONITOR STRATEGY
Related DTCs P2A00: A/F sensor slow response
Required sensors/ components (Main) A/F sensor
Required sensors/ components (Related) Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
Frequency of operation Once per driving cycle
Duration 60 sec.
MIL operation 2 driving cycles
Sequence of operation None

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS

TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS
The monitor will run whenever the following DTCs are not present See LIST OF DISABLE A MONITOR
Engine condition Running
Time after engine start 120 sec. or more
Fuel system status Closed Loop
A/F sensor status Activated
Idle OFF
Time after idle OFF 2 sec. or more
Engine RPM 1,400 to 3,200 rpm
Vehicle speed 60 to 120 km/h (37 to 75 mph)
Fuel cut OFF
Time after fuel cut is OFF 2 sec. or more
Driving record for 20 sec. or more 40 km/h (25 mph) or more and 900 rpm or more

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS

TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS
Response rate deterioration level 8 or more

MONITOR STATUS

The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in this component can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. This procedure is described in "CHECKING MONITOR STATUS" (see CHECKING MONITOR STATUS).

  • TID (Test Identification Data) is assigned to each emission-related component.
  • TLT (Test Limit Type):

    If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit.

    If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.

  • CID (Component Identification Data) is assigned to each test value.
  • Unit Conversion is used to calculate the test value indicated on generic OBD scan tools.

TID $06: A/F Sensor

TEST IDENTIFICATION DATA - A/F SENSOR
TLT CID Unit Conversion Description of Test Value Description of Test Limit
0 $01 Multiply by 0.000244 (No dimension) Parameter for identify A/F sensor response rate (bank 1) Malfunction criterion

WIRING DIAGRAM

Refer to wiring in DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) .

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

It is possible the malfunctioning area can be found using the ACTIVE TEST A/F CONTROL operation. The A/F CONTROL operation can determine if the A/F sensor, heated oxygen sensor or other potential trouble areas are malfunctioning or not.

  1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3 on the vehicle.
  2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
  3. Warm up the engine by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
  4. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL.
  5. Perform the A/F CONTROL operation with the engine idle (press the right or left button).

    Result:

    A/F sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

    +25 % --> RICH output: Less than 3.0 V

    -12.5 % --> LEAN output: More than 3.35 V

    Heated oxygen sensor reacts in accordance with increase and decrease of injection volume:

    +25 % --> RICH output: More than 0.55 V

    -12.5 % --> LEAN output: Less than 0.4 V

    NOTE: The A/F sensor output has a few seconds of delay and the heated oxygen sensor output has about 20 seconds of delay at maximum.

    Fig. 348: Active Test Result Chart
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    The following A/F CONTROL procedure enables a technician to check and graph the voltage outputs of both the A/F sensor and the heated oxygen sensor.

    For displaying the graph, enter "ACTIVE TEST/A/F CONTROL/USER DATA", select "AFS B1S1 and O2S B1S2" by pressing "YES" and push "ENTER". Then press "F4".

    HINT:

    • DTC P2A00 may be also detected, when the air fuel ratio is stuck rich or lean.
    • A low A/F sensor voltage could be caused by a RICH air-fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run with a RICH air-fuel mixture.
    • A high A/F sensor voltage could be caused by a LEAN air-fuel mixture. Check for conditions that would cause the engine to run with a LEAN air-fuel mixture.
    • Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting, freeze frame data can help determine if the vehicle was running or stopped, if the engine was warmed up or not, if the air-fuel ratio was lean or rich, and other data from the time the malfunction occurred.
  1. CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT (IN ADDITION TO A/F SENSOR DTC)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      Only P2A00 is output A
      P2A00 and other codes is output B

      HINT:

      If any other codes besides P2A00 is output, perform the troubleshoot on that DTC before.

    1. B: GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. READ VALUE OF OBD II SCAN TOOL OR HAND-HELD TESTER (OUTPUT VOLTAGE OF A/F SENSOR)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Warm up the A/F sensor (bank 1 sensor 1) by running the engine at 2,500 rpm for approximately 90 seconds.
    3. Read the A/F sensor voltage output on the hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool.
    4. Hand-held tester only:

      On the hand-held tester, enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/SNAPSHOT/MANUAL SNAPSHOT/USER DATA. Read the values.

    5. Select "AFS B1 S1/ENGINE SPD" and press YES.
    6. Monitor the A/F sensor voltage carefully.
    7. Check the A/F sensor voltage output under the following conditions:
      1. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
      2. Run the engine at approximately 2,500 rpm. Do not suddenly change the rpm.
      3. Raise the engine speed to 4,000 rpm and quickly release the accelerator pedal so that the throttle is fully closed.

      Standard:

      Condition (1) and (2)

      Voltage change of 3.3 V (0.66 V)* (between approximately 3.1 to 3.5 V) as shown in the illustration.

      Condition (3)

      A/F sensor voltage increases to 3.8 V (0.76 V)* or more when fuel is cut during engine deceleration as shown in the illustration.

      *: Voltage when using the OBD II scan tool.

      Fig. 349: Engine RPM And A/F Sensor Voltage Normal And Malfunction Condition
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      HINT:

      • Whenever the A/F sensor output voltage remains at approximately 3.3 V (0.660 V) on OBD II scan tool under any condition as well as the above conditions, the A/F sensor may have an open circuit. This will happen also when the A/F sensor heater has an open circuit.
      • Whenever the A/F sensor output voltage remains at a certain value of approximately 3.8 V (0.76 V) on OBD II scan tool or more, or 2.8 V (0.56 V) on OBD II scan tool or less under any condition as well as the above conditions, the A/F sensor may have a short circuit.
      • The ECM will stop fuel injection (fuel is cut) during engine deceleration. This will cause a LEAN condition and should result in a momentary increase in the A/F sensor output voltage.
      • The ECM must establish a closed throttle position learned value to perform fuel cut. If the battery terminal has been disconnected, the vehicle must be driven over 10 mph (16 km/h) to allow the ECM to learn the closed throttle position.
      • When the vehicle is driven:

        The output voltage of the A/F sensor may be below 2.8 V (0.76 V) on OBD II scan tool during fuel enrichment. For the vehicle, this translates to a sudden increase in speed with the accelerator pedal fully depressed when trying to overtake another vehicle. The A/F sensor is functioning normally.

      • The A/F sensor is a current output element, and therefore the current is converted into voltage inside the ECM. If measuring voltage at connectors of the A/F sensor or ECM, you will observe a constant voltage.
    1. OK: Go to step 14.
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR (HEATER RESISTANCE)
    1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the A/F sensor terminals.

      Fig. 350: Identifying Air Fuel Ratio Sensor Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition
      1 (HT) - 2 (+B) 20°C (68°F) 1.8 to 3.4 ohms
      1 (HT) - 4 (AF-) - 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 351: Identifyiing EFI Relay Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (A/F SENSOR - ECM)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and A/F sensor.
      1. Disconnect the A6 A/F sensor connector.
      2. Disconnect the E8 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 352: Identifying A/F Sensor & ECM Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      Fig. 353: Harness Resistance Values
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 354: A/F Sensor And EFI Relay Circuit Diagram
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    1. Check for vacuum leaks in the air induction system.

      OK: There is no leak in the air induction system.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK CONNECTION OF PCV HOSE

    OK: PCV hose is connected correctly and PCV hose has no damage.

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE PCV HOSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )
    1. Check fuel pressure (high or low fuel pressure).

      Standard:

      FUEL PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS
      Item Specified Condition
      Fuel pressure 304 to 343 kPa (3.1 to 3.5 kgf/cm2 , 44 to 55 psi)

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE FUEL SYSTEM
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See INSPECTION )
    1. Check injector injection (high or low fuel injection quantity or poor injection pattern).

      Standard:

      INJECTION VOLUME SPECIFICATIONS
      Injection Volume Difference Between Each Injector
      76 to 91 cm3 (4.6 to 5.5cu in.) /15 seconds 15 cm3 (0.9 cu in.) or less

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL INJECTOR ASSY (See appropriate Fuel Systems article)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  11. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1))

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern (see DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)).

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  12. READ OUTPUT PTC (A/F SENSOR PTC OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      DTC P2A00 is not output A
      DTC P2A00 is output B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT ) AND PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1) )
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  13. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST
    1. NO: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. YES: DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
  14. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1))

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern (see DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)).

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  15. READ OUTPUT DTC (A/F SENSOR DTC OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      DTC P2A00 is output A
      DTC P2A00 is not output B

    1. B: Go to step 19.
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  16. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  17. PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1))

    HINT:

    Clear all DTCs prior to performing the confirmation driving pattern (see DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)).

    1. GO TO NEXT STEP.
  18. READ OUTPUT DTC (A/F SENSOR DTC OUTPUT AGAIN)
    1. Read the DTC using the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool.

      Result:

      DTC OUTPUT RESULT
      Display Proceed to
      DTC P2A00 is not output A
      DTC P2A00 is output B

    1. B: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT ) AND PERFORM CONFIRMATION DRIVING PATTERN (See DTC P2195, P2196: OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR SIGNAL STUCK (BANK 1 SENSOR 1))
    2. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  19. CONFIRM IF VEHICLE HAS RUN OUT OF FUEL IN PAST

    OK: Vehicle has run out of fuel in past.

    1. NO: CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS)
    2. YES: DTC IS CAUSED BY RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

When the ignition switch is turned ON, battery voltage is applied to terminal IGSW of the ECM. The ECM "MREL" output signal causes current to flow to the coil, closing the contacts of the EFI relay (Marking: EFI) and supplying power to terminal +B of the ECM.

If the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM holds the EFI relay ON for a maximum of 2 seconds to allow for the initial setting of the throttle valve.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 355: ECM Power Source Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

  1. INSPECT ECM (+B VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage between of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 356: Identifying ECM Connector Power & Ground Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-1 (+B) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - BODY GROUND)
    1. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.
    2. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Fig. 357: Identifying E9 ECM Connector Resistance Test Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E9-1 (E1) - Body ground Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM (IGSW VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 358: Identifying E9 And E5 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-9 (IGSW) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: Go to step 6.
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK FUSE (IGN)
    1. Remove the IGN fuse from the instrument panel J/B Assy.
    2. Measure the resistance of the IGN fuse.

      Fig. 359: Locating IGN Fuse
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard: Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE FUSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY
    1. Measure the resistance of the ignition switch terminals.

      Fig. 360: Identifying Ignition Switch Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Switch Condition Tester Condition Specified Condition
      LOCK 6 (IG2) - 7 (AM2) 10 kohms or higher
      ON 6 (IG2) - 7 (AM2) Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY
    2. OK: CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY - IGNITION SWITCH, IGNITION SWITCH - ECM)
  6. INSPECT ECM (MREL VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 361: Identifying E9 And E5 ECM Connector Voltage Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-8 (MREL) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK FUSE (EFI NO. 1)
    1. Remove the EFI NO. 1 fuse from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI NO. 1 fuse.

      Fig. 362: Locating EFI No. 1 Fuse
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard: Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPLACE FUSE
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. INSPECT RELAY (EFI)
    1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
    2. Measure the resistance of the EFI relay.

      Fig. 363: Identifying EFI Relay Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (EFI RELAY - ECM, EFI RELAY - BODY GROUND)
    1. Check the wire harness between the EFI relay and ECM.
      1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
      2. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      J/B EFI relay terminal 1 - E5-8 (MREL) Below 1 ohms
      J/B FFI relay terminal 1 or E5-8 (MREL) - Body around 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the EFI relay and body ground.
      1. Remove the EFI relay from the engine room J/B.
      2. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connector and the body ground.

        3. Fig. 364: Locating EFI Relay & Identifying ECM Resistance Test Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      J/B EFI relay terminal 2 - Body ground Below 1 ohms

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. NG: CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TERMINAL +B OF ECM - BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL)

EVAP INSPECTION PROCEDURE

RELATED DTC OF EVAP

Fig. 365: EVAP Related DTC And Monitoring Item Description Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

If the EVAP system's DTCs are set, the malfunctioning area can be determined with EVAP DTC'S MALFUNCTIONING AREA DETERMINING CHART.

Fig. 366: EVAP DTC'S Malfunctioning Area Determining Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Fig. 367: Locating EVAP System Components
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 368: EVAP System Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

While the engine is running, if a predetermined condition (closed loop, etc.) is met, the purge VSV is opened by the ECM and stored fuel vapors in the canister are purged to the intake manifold. The ECM will change the duty cycle ratio of the purge VSV to control purge flow volume.

Purge flow volume is also determined by the intake manifold pressure. Atmospheric pressure is allowed into the canister through the vent valve to ensure that purge flow is maintained when negative pressure (vacuum) is applied to the canister.

Two monitors are run to confirm proper EVAP system operation.

Key-off monitor

This monitor checks for EVAP system leaks and pump module malfunctions. The monitor starts 5 hours (+/-15 minutes) after the ignition switch is turned OFF. The 5 hours are required to allow enough time for the fuel to cool down. As a result, Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) becomes stable and EVAP system monitor will be more accurate. Then, the electric vacuum pump creates negative pressure (vacuum) in the EVAP system and the pressure is measured. Finally, the ECM monitors for EVAP system leaks and pump module malfunctions based on EVAP pressure.

Purge flow monitor

If EVAP system pressure change is less than 7.5 mmHg (1 kPa) when the engine is running and the purge VSV is turned ON (closed), the ECM determines that the purge flow is insufficient.

Fig. 369: EVAP Purge Flow Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 370: Purge Flow Monitor Components Operation Chart
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 371: Pump Module On/Off Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 372: Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Graph
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 373: Soak Timer Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 374: Pump Module ECM wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

NOTE:
  • When a vehicle is brought into the workshop, leave it as is. Do not change the vehicle condition.
  • For example, do not tighten the fuel cap. Do not disassemble the pump module.

  1. CONFIRM DTC
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait 10 seconds.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait 10 seconds.
    4. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    5. Turn the ignition switch ON and press the hand-held tester switch ON.
    6. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/DTC INFO/CURRENT CODES.
    7. Confirm the DTCs and freeze frame data.

      If the EVAP system's DTCs are set, the malfunctioning area can be determined with the table below.

      8. Fig. 375: EVAP DTC'S Malfunctioning Area Determining Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NEXT: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTO OPERATION)

    NOTE:
    • In the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTO OPERATION), 6 series of EVAP SYSTEM CHECK steps are performed automatically. It takes approximately 15 minutes maximum.
    • Do not perform the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK when the fuel tank is more than 90 % full because the cut-off valve may be closed and the leak check of the fuel tank is unavailable.
    • Do not run the engine.
    • When the temperature of the fuel is 35 C(95 F) or more, a large amount of vapors form and any check results become inaccurate. When performing an EVAP SYSTEM CHECK, keep the temperature below 35°C(95°F).

    1. Clear the DTC with the hand-held tester.
    2. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBDII/SYSTEM CHECK/EVAP SYS CHECK/AUTO OPERATION.
    3. After the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK is completed, check for pending DTC. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBDII/DTC INFO/PENDING DTC.
    1. NEXT: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (MANUAL OPERATION)

    Fig. 376: EVAP System Check (Manual Operation)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    NOTE:
    • In the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (MANUAL OPERATION), 6 series of EVAP SYSTEM CHECK steps are performed manually.
    • Do not perform the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK when the fuel tank is more than 90 % full because the cut-off valve may be closed and the leak check of the fuel tank is unavailable.
    • Do not run the engine.
    • When the temperature of the fuel is 35°C (95°F) or more, a large amount of vapors form and any check results become inaccurate. When performing an EVAP SYSTEM CHECK, keep the temperature below 35°C (95°F).

    1. Clear the DTC with the hand-held tester.
    2. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBDII/SYSTEM CHECK/EVAP SYS CHECK/MANUAL OPERATION.
    1. NEXT: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 1/6 - 2/6)

    Fig. 377: EVAP System Check (Step 1/6 - 2/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Check the EVAP pressure from step 1/6 to 2/6.

    Fig. 378: EVAP Pressure Result Chart (Step 1/6 - 2/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 22.
    2. C: Go to step 29.
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 3/6)

    Fig. 379: EVAP System Check (Step 3/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Proceed to step 3/6. 60 seconds later, check the EVAP pressure.
    2. Make a note of the 0.02 inch leak pressure.

      Fig. 380: EVAP Pressure Result Chart (Step 3/6)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 10.
    2. C: Go to step 29.
    3. D: Go to step 18.
    4. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 3/6 - 4/6)

    Fig. 381: EVAP System Check (Step 3/6 - 4/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Proceed to step 4/6. Check the EVAP pressure increase.

    Fig. 382: EVAP Pressure Result Chart (Step 3/6 - 4/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 19.
    2. C: Go to step 29.
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 4/6)

    Fig. 383: EVAP System Check Graphical Representation (Step 4/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. Wait until the EVAP pressure change is less than 0.75 mmHg (0.1 kPa) for 30 seconds.
    2. Measure the EVAP pressure.

      HINT:

      A few minutes are required for the EVAP pressure to be saturated. When fuel in the fuel tank is little, it takes maximum 12 minutes.

      Fig. 384: EVAP Pressure Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 11.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  8. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 4/6 - 5/6)

    Fig. 385: EVAP System Check (Step 4/6 - 5/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Proceed to 5/6 and check the EVAP pressure.

    Fig. 386: EVAP Pressure Result Chart (Step 5/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 29.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  9. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 5/6 - 6/6)

    Fig. 387: EVAP System Check (Step 5/6 - 6/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Proceed to 6/6 and check the EVAP pressure.

    Fig. 388: EVAP Pressure Result Chart (Step 6/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. A: Go to step 35.
    2. B: Go to step 14.
    3. C: Go to step 11.
    4. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  10. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (STEP 4/6)

    Fig. 389: EVAP System Check (Step 4/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    Proceed to step 4/6. Check the EVAP pressure.

    Fig. 390: EVAP Pressure Result Chart (Step 4/6)
    Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. A: Go to step 29.
    2. B: Go to step 22.
  11. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST (PURGE VSV)
    1. Finish the system check.
    2. Disconnect the hose (to canister) from the purge VSV.
    3. Start the engine.
    4. Enter the following menus: ACTIVE TEST/EVAP VSV (ALONE) on the hand-held tester.
    5. Turn the purge VSV OFF (EVAP VSV: OFF).
    6. Use your finger and confirm that the purge VSV has no suction.
    7. Turn the purge VSV ON (EVAP VSV: ON).
    8. Use your finger and confirm that the purge VSV has suction.

      Fig. 391: Disconnecting Hose From Purge VSV
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 392: Active Test Result Chart (Purge VSV)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 13.
    2. C: Go to step 14.
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  12. CHECK FUEL CAP
    1. Check if the fuel cap is tightened until a few "click" sounds are heard.
    2. If you have the EVAP tester, check the fuel cap using the fuel cap adaptor.
      1. Install the fuel cap to the fuel cap adaptor, and connect the hose from the EVAP tester's pump.
      2. Pressurize the fuel cap adaptor 24-28 mmHg or 45 seconds.
      3. Stop the pump and seal the fuel cap adaptor.
      4. Wait 2 minutes.
      5. Confirm that the pressure is higher than 15 mmHg.

      If the pressure is higher than 15 mmHg, the fuel cap is normal.

      If the pressure is less than 15 mmHg, the fuel cap is malfunctioning.

      FUEL CAP TEST RESULT
      Result Proceed to
      Fuel cap is normal. A
      Fuel cap is loose. B
      No fuel cap, fuel cap is malfunctioning or fuel cap does not meet OEM specification. C

    1. A: Go to step 28.
    2. B: Go to step 26.
    3. C: Go to step 27.
  13. INSPECT PURGE VSV
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Disconnect the purge VSV connector.
    3. Start the engine.
    4. Use your finger and confirm that the purge VSV has no suction.

      5. Fig. 393: Locating Purge VSV Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 394: Purge VSV Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: Go to step 34.
    2. NG: Go to step 30.
  14. CHECK EVAP HOSE (PURGE VSV - THROTTLE BODY)
    1. Disconnect the hose (to throttle body) from the purge VSV.
    2. Start the engine.
    3. Use your finger and confirm that the purge VSV has suction.

      4. Fig. 395: Disconnecting Throttle Body Hose From Purge VSV
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 396: Purge VSV - Throttle Body Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 25.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  15. INSPECT PURGE VSV
    1. Remove the purge VSV.
    2. Apply battery voltage to the purge VSV.
    3. Using an air gun, confirm that air flows from A to B as shown in the illustration.

      4. Fig. 397: Applying Battery Voltage To Purge VSV
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 398: Purge VSV Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 30.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  16. CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (POWER SOURCE OF PURGE VSV)
    1. Disconnect the V4 Purge VSV connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Measure the voltage between terminal 1 of the V4 connector and the body ground.

      4. Fig. 399: Identifying V4 Purge VSV Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 400: V4 Purge VSV Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 31.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  17. CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (PURGE VSV - ECM)
    1. Disconnect the E7 connector and the V4 purge VSV connector.
    2. Measure the resistance between the E7 and V4 connecters.

      Fig. 401: Identifying E7 ECM Connector Resistance Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 402: Identifying V4 Purge VSV Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E7-34 (PRG) - V4-2 10 ohms or less
      E7-34 (PRG) - Body ground 10 kohms or more
      V4-2 - Body ground 10 kohms or more

    1. OK: Go to step 34.
    2. NG: Go to step 31.
  18. CHECK ECM (FOR VENT VALVE)
    1. Finish the system check.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Enter the following menus: ACTIVE TEST/VENT VALVE (ALONE) on the hand-held tester.
    4. Operates the vent valve (ON/OFF) and measure the voltage between E5-27 (VPMP) of the ECM terminal and the body ground.

      5. Fig. 403: Identifying E5 ECM Connector Voltage Test Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 404: ECM Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. A: Go to step 21.
    2. B: Go to step 34.
  19. CHECK ECM (FOR VENT VALVE)
    1. Finish the system check.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Enter the following menus: ACTIVE TEST/VENT VALVE (ALONE) on the hand-held tester.
    4. Operates the vent valve (ON/OFF) and measure the voltage between E5-27 (VPMP) of the ECM terminal and the body ground.

      5. Fig. 405: Identifying E5 ECM Connector Voltage Test Terminal
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 406: ECM Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. B: Go to step 21.
    2. C: Go to step 34.
    3. A: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  20. CHECK POWER SOURCE (FOR VENT VALVE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Remove the exhaust tail pipe and the heat insulator under the canister.
    3. Disconnect the C17 canister connector.
    4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    5. Measure the voltage between terminal 9 of the C17 connector and the body ground.

      6. Fig. 407: Locating C17 Canister Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 408: Identifying C17 Canister Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 409: Vent Valve Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 31.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  21. INSPECT VENT VALVE
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Apply the positive battery voltage to terminal 9 of the pump module and the negative battery voltage to terminal 8 of the pump module.
    3. Touch the pump module to confirm the vent valve operation.

      4. Fig. 410: Inspecting Vent Valve Operation (Energized)
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 411: Vent Valve Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: Go to step 31.
    2. NG: Go to step 29.
  22. CHECK ECM (FOR VACUUM PUMP)
    1. Proceed to step 7/6 and finish the system check.
    2. Enter the following menus: ACTIVE TEST/VCUMM PUMP (ALONE) on the hand-held tester.
    3. Measure the voltage between E5-4 (MPMP) of the ECM terminal and the body ground when operating the vacuum pump with the tester.

      4. Fig. 412: Identifying E5 ECM Connector Voltage Test Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 413: Vacuum Pump Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 34.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  23. CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VACUUM PUMP - ECM)
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Remove the exhaust tail pipe and the heat insulator under the canister.
    3. Disconnect the C17 canister connector.
    4. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    5. Enter the following menus: ACTIVE TEST/VCUMM PUMP (ALONE) on the hand-held tester.
    6. Turn the vacuum pump ON with the tester.
    7. Measure the voltage between the terminal C17-1 and the body ground.

      8. Fig. 414: Locating C17 Canister Connector
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 415: Identifying C17 Canister Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 416: Vacuum Pump ECM Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NG: Go to step 31.
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  24. CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (VACUUM PUMP - GROUND)
    1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
    2. Measure the resistance between the terminal C17-6 and the body ground.

      3. Fig. 417: Identifying C17 Canister Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Fig. 418: Vacuum Pump - Ground Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: Go to step 29.
    2. NG: Go to step 31.
  25. CHECK THROTTLE BODY
    1. Stop the engine.
    2. Disconnect the EVAP hose from the throttle body.
    3. Start the engine.
    4. Use your finger and confirm that the throttle body has suction.

      5. Fig. 419: Throttle Body Test Result Chart
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: Go to step 32.
    2. NG: Go to step 33.
  26. TIGHTEN FUEL CAP

    Tighten the fuel cap until a few "click" sounds are heard.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  27. REPLACE FUEL CAP

    Install a new fuel cap and tighten it until a few "click" sounds are heard.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  28. REPAIR EVAP LEAK
    1. Reinstall the fuel cap.
    2. Remove the exhaust tail pipe.
    3. Remove the heat insulator under the canister.
    4. Pinch the atmospheric side hose of the pump module with the clip (SST) to close the canister's passage to air.

      SST 00002-6872A

      5. Fig. 420: Pinching Pump Module Atmospheric Side Hose
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    5. Connect the pressure gauge (SST) to the service port (green cap near the air cleaner box).
    6. Pressurize the EVAP system until 24 to 28 mmHg.

      NOTE: More than 35 mmHg of pressure will damage the EVAP system. Pay attention to the pressure.

    7. Apply soapy water to the piping and connecting parts of the EVAP system. Look for the area where bubbles appear. This area cause leaks.

      HINT:

      • If the system has leaks, a whistling sound will be heard.
      • Disconnect the hose between canister and fuel tank from the canister. Close the canister on the area where the hose was connected and perform an inspection. The fuel tank can be eliminated from the suspected areas for leak checks.
    8. Repair or replace the leak point.

      9. Fig. 421: Connecting Pressure Gauge To Service Port
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  29. REPLACE PUMP MODULE
    1. Remove the exhaust tail pipe.
    2. Remove the heat insulator under the canister.
    3. Disconnect the hoses and the connector.
    4. Remove the 3 bolts and the pump module with the O-ring.
    5. Install a new pump module with a new O-ring.
    6. Install the 3 bolts.
    7. Connect the hoses and the connector.
    8. Go to the next step before installing the exhaust tail pipe.

      9. Fig. 422: Identifying Pump Module
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  30. REPLACE PURGE VSV
    1. Disconnect the connector and the hoses
    2. Remove the purge VSV.
    3. Install a new one.
    4. Connect the connector and the hoses.

      5. Fig. 423: Locating Purge VSV
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  31. REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

    In case that the exhaust tail pipe is removed, go to the next step before installing it.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  32. REPLACE EVAP HOSE (THROTTLE BODY - PURGE VSV)
    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  33. CHECK THROTTLE BODY
    1. Remove the throttle body (See REPLACEMENT ).
    2. Check that there is no clog in the EVAP purge port of the throttle body. If necessary, replace the throttle body.
    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  34. REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  35. REPAIR PTC PART

    Repair the malfunctioning area indicated by the confirmed DTCs when the vehicle was brought in.

    1. NEXT: Go to step 36.
  36. PERFORM EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTO OPERATION)

    NOTE:
    • In the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK (AUTO OPERATION), 6 series of EVAP SYSTEM CHECK steps are performed automatically. It takes approximately 15 minutes maximum.
    • Do not perform the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK when the fuel tank is more than 90 % full because the cut-off valve may be closed and the leak check of the fuel tank is unavailable.
    • Do not run the engine.
    • When the temperature of the fuel is 35°C (95°F) or more, a large amount of vapors form and any check results become inaccurate. When performing an EVAP SYSTEM CHECK, keep the temperature below 35°C (95°F).

    1. Clear the DTC with the hand-held tester.
    2. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBDII/SYSTEM CHECK/EVAP SYS CHECK/AUTO OPERATION.
    3. After the EVAP SYSTEM CHECK is complete, check for pending DTCs.
    4. If no pending DTC is displayed, the repair has been completed properly.

MONITOR STATUS

The Monitor Status (mode 6) allows the OBD scan tool to display the monitor result, test value and test limit (malfunction criterion). A problem in the EVAP system can be found by comparing the test value and test limit. This procedure is described in "CHECKING MONITOR STATUS" (see CHECKING MONITOR STATUS). Check the monitor status after running the vehicle with the monitor drive pattern (Refer to MONITOR CONFIRMATION DRIVE PATTERN).

  • TID (Test Identification) is assigned to each emission-related component.
  • TLT (Test Limit Type):

    If TLT is 0, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is higher than the test limit.

    If TLT is 1, the component is malfunctioning when the test value is lower than the test limit.

  • CID (Component Identification) is assigned to each test value.
  • Unit Conversion is used to calculate the test value indicated on generic OBD scan tools.

TID $02: EVAP - Key-off Monitor (2004 Highlander, 2AZ-FE Engine)

Fig. 424: Test Identification Data Chart (EVAP - Key-Off Monitor)
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 425: EVAP - Key-Off Monitor Pressure
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

Fig. 426: EVAP - Purge Flow Monitor Pressure
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

MONITOR CONFIRMATION DRIVE PATTERN

Check the monitor status after driving with this drive pattern.

  1. KEY-OFF MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Confirm the following conditions are satisfied:
      • The fuel level is less than 90 %.
      • The altitude is less than 8,000 ft. (2,400 m).
      • The vehicle is stopped (the vehicle speed is less than 2 mph).
      • The ECT is 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
      • The IAT is 4.4 to 35°C (40 to 95°F)
    3. Perform the drive pattern:
      1. Allow the engine to idle for 5 minutes or more.
      2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait 6 hours.
    4. Check the monitor status with the hand-held tester.
  2. PURGE FLOW MONITOR DRIVE PATTERN (P0441)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Confirm that the following conditions are satisfied:
      • The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is more than 4.4°C (40°F).
      • The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is more than 4.4°C (40°F).
    3. Perform the drive pattern:
      1. Remove and reinstall the fuel cap to release the fuel tank pressure.
      2. Warm the engine until the ECT reaches 75°C (167°F) or more.
      3. Run the engine at 3,000 rpm once.
      4. Allow the engine to idle and turn on the air conditioning (A/C) for 1 minute.
    4. Check the monitor status with the hand-held tester.

FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

When the engine is cranked, current flows from the ignition switch terminal ST1 to the starter relay coil (Marking: STARTER), and current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal).

When the STA signal and NE signal are input to the ECM, Tr is turned ON, current flows to coil of the circuit opening relay, (Marking) the relay switches on, power is supplied to the fuel pump and the fuel pump operates.

While the NE signal is generated and the engine is running, the ECM keeps Tr ON (Circuit Opening relay ON) and the fuel pump also keeps operating.

Fig. 427: Fuel Pump Control Circuit Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 428: Fuel Pump Control Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

Hand-held tester:

  1. PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND-HELD TESTER (OPERATE CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY)
    1. Connect the hand-held tester to the DLC3.
    2. Turn ON the ignition switch. Push the hand-held tester main switch.
    3. Enter the following menus: DIAGNOSIS/ENHANCED OBD II/ACTIVE TEST/FUEL PUMP/SPD.
    4. Check the relay operation while operating it with the hand-held tester.

      OK: Operating noise can be heard from the relay.

    1. OK: Go to step 5.
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. INSPECT CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY
    1. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
    2. Measure the resistance of the circuit opening relay.

      Fig. 429: Measuring Circuit Opening Relay Resistance
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 Below 1 ohms (when battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT ECM (FC VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 430: Identifying E9 And E5 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-10 (FC) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY - IGNITION SWITCH)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and circuit opening relay.
      1. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
      2. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 431: Removing Circuit Opening Relay From R/B Sub-Assembly
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-10 (FC) - R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 2 Below 1 ohms
      E5-10 (FC) or R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 2 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the circuit opening relay and ignition switch.
      1. Check the IGN fuse.
        • Remove the IGN fuse from the instrument panel J/B.
        • Measure the resistance of the IGN fuse.

          Standard: Below 1 ohms

        • Reinstall the IGN fuse.
      2. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
      3. Disconnect the I15 ignition switch connector.
      4. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        5. Fig. 432: Removing Circuit Opening Relay From R/B Sub-Assembly
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 1 - I15-6 (IG2) Below 1 ohms
      I15-6 (IG2)or R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 1 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
  5. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSY
    1. Measure the resistance of the fuel pump terminals.

      Fig. 433: Identifying F12 Fuel Pump Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Condition Condition Specified Condition
      4 - 5 20°C (68°F) 0.2 to 0.3 ohms

    2. Check operation of the fuel pump.
      1. Apply battery voltage to both the terminals. Check that the pump operates.

      NOTE:
      • These tests must be done quickly (within 10 seconds) to prevent the coil from burning out.
      • Keep the fuel pump as far away from the battery as possible.
      • Always turn ON and OFF the voltage on the battery side, not the fuel pump side.

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY (See appropriate Fuel Systems article)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  6. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY - FUEL PUMP, FUEL PUMP - BODY GROUND)
    1. Check the wire harness between the circuit opening relay and fuel pump.
      1. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
      2. Disconnect the F12 fuel pump connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 434: Removing Circuit Opening Relay From R/B Sub-Assembly
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 3 - F12-4 Below 1 ohms
      F12-4 or R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 3 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the fuel pump and body ground.
      1. Disconnect the F12 fuel pump connector.
      2. Measure the resistance between the wire harness side connector and body ground.

        3. Fig. 435: Identifying F12 Fuel Pump Connector Terminals (Wire Harness Side)
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      F12-5 - Body ground Below 1 ohms

    1. OK: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. NG: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

OBD II scan tool (excluding hand-held tester):

  1. CHECK FUEL PUMP OPERATION (See ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION )
    1. Check if there is pressure in the fuel inlet hose.

      HINT:

      The pipe has fuel pressure if the sound of flowing fuel can be heard.

    1. OK: PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK RELAY OPERATION (CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY)
    1. When connecting between terminal FC of the ECM connector and body ground, check relay operation.

      Fig. 436: Identifying E5 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      OK: Noise can be heard from the circuit opening relay.

    1. OK: Go to step 6.
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  3. INSPECT CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY
    1. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
    2. Measure the resistance of the circuit opening relay.

      Fig. 437: Measuring Circuit Opening Relay Resistance
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      3 - 5 10 kohms or higher
      3 - 5 (when Below 1 ohms battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2)

    1. NG: REPLACE CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT ECM (FC VOLTAGE)
    1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    2. Measure the voltage of the ECM connectors.

      Fig. 438: Identifying E9 And E5 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-10 (FC) - E9-1 (E1) 9 to 14 V

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  5. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (ECM - CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY, CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY - IGNITION SWITCH)
    1. Check the wire harness between the ECM and circuit opening relay.
      1. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
      2. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 439: Disconnecting E5 ECM Connector
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      E5-10 (FC) - R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 2 Below 1 ohms
      E5-10 (FC) or R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 2 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the circuit opening relay and ignition switch.
      1. Check the IGN fuse.
        • Remove the IGN fuse from the instrument panel J/B Assy.
        • Check the resistance of the IGN fuse.

          Standard: Below 1 ohms

        • Reinstall the IGN fuse.
      2. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B sub-assy.
      3. Disconnect the I15 ignition switch connector.
      4. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        5. Fig. 440: Removing Circuit Opening Relay From R/B Sub-Assembly
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 1 - I15-6 (IG2) Below 1 ohms
      I15-6 (IG2) or R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 1 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
  6. INSPECT FUEL PUMP ASSY
    1. Measure the resistance of the fuel pump terminals.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Condition Condition Specified Condition
      4 - 5 20°C (68°F) 0.2 to 0.3 ohms

    2. Check operation of the fuel pump.
      1. Apply battery voltage to both the terminals. Check that the pump operates.

        2. Fig. 441: Identifying F12 Fuel Pump Connector Terminals
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      NOTE:
      • These tests must be done quickly (within 10 seconds) to prevent the coil from burning out.
      • Keep the fuel pump as far away from the battery as possible.
      • Always turns ON and OFF the voltage on the battery side, not the fuel pump side.

    1. NG: REPLACE FUEL PUMP ASSY (See appropriate Fuel Systems article)
    2. OK: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  7. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (CIRCUIT OPENING RELAY - FUEL PUMP, FUEL PUMP - BODY GROUND)
    1. Check the wire harness between the circuit opening relay and fuel pump.
      1. Remove the circuit opening relay from the R/B Sub-Assy.
      2. Disconnect the F12 fuel pump connector.
      3. Measure the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.

        4. Fig. 442: Disconnecting F12 Fuel Pump Connector
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 3 - F12-4 Below 1 ohms
      F12-4 or R/B sub-assy circuit opening relay terminal 3 - Body ground 10 kohms or higher

    2. Check the wire harness between the fuel pump and body ground.
      1. Disconnect the F12 fuel pump connector.
      2. Measure the resistance between the wire harness side connector and body ground.

        3. Fig. 443: Identifying F12 Fuel Pump Connector Terminals (Wire Harness Side)
        Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

      Standard:

      TESTER CONNECTION AND CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS
      Tester Connection Specified Condition
      F12-5 - Body ground Below 1 ohms

    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
    2. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )

MIL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is used to indicate the ECM's detection of a vehicle malfunction. The instrument panel IG2 fuse provides circuit power and the ECM provides the circuit ground that illuminates the MIL.

MIL operations should be checked visually:

The MIL should be illuminated when the ignition is first turned ON. If the MIL is always ON or OFF, use the hand-held tester or OBD II scan tool and follow the procedures to determine the cause of problem.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Fig. 444: ECM MIL Wiring Diagram
Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HINT:

Troubleshoot each trouble symptom in accordance with the chart below.

MIL CONDITION INSPECTION
MIL remains on Start inspection from step 1
MIL is not illuminated Start inspection from step 3

  1. CLEAR DTC
    1. Connect the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool to the DLC3.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand-held tester or the OBD II scan tool main switch ON.
    3. Read the DTC.
    4. Clear the DTC (see DTC CHECK/CLEAR).
    5. Check that the MIL is not illuminated.

      OK: MIL is not illuminated

    1. OK: REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT DTC (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART)
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  2. CHECK WIRE HARNESS (CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS)
    1. Disconnect the E5 ECM connector.
    2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
    3. Check that the MIL is not illuminated.

      OK: MIL is not illuminated

      4. Fig. 445: Identifying E5 ECM Connector Terminals
      Courtesy of TOYOTA MOTOR SALES, U.S.A., INC.

    1. OK: REPLACE ECM (See REPLACEMENT )
    2. NG: CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR
  3. CHECK THAT MIL IS ILLUMINATED
    1. Check that the MIL is illuminated when turning the ignition switch ON.

      OK: MIL is illuminated

    1. NG: SYSTEM OK
    2. NG: GO TO NEXT STEP.
  4. INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (MIL CIRCUIT)
    1. See the combination meter troubleshooting on PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .
    1. NG: REPAIR OR REPLACE BULB OR COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY
    2. OK: CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER - ECM)
Didn't find what you were looking for? Try to find in:
- Alldata Online (Beta)

This project exists mainly due to the display of advertising.

Due to the international situation, making a profit from advertising has become impossible.

If this continues, then the project will either close completely, or become closed and paid.

To support the project, you can Buy a paid subscription


Can be closed in 20